diff options
| author | giraffedata <giraffedata@9d0c8265-081b-0410-96cb-a4ca84ce46f8> | 2020-06-24 02:17:11 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | giraffedata <giraffedata@9d0c8265-081b-0410-96cb-a4ca84ce46f8> | 2020-06-24 02:17:11 +0000 |
| commit | d06e8ef37fbe6594a5cd73a1c897a816db99f35c (patch) | |
| tree | 2eded7e8c8839c78a484aee3c874c6ef605a5de6 | |
| parent | aed071d6acf292f6cd0dd2a00b1ab54101aa6009 (diff) | |
| download | netpbm-mirror-d06e8ef37fbe6594a5cd73a1c897a816db99f35c.tar.gz netpbm-mirror-d06e8ef37fbe6594a5cd73a1c897a816db99f35c.tar.xz netpbm-mirror-d06e8ef37fbe6594a5cd73a1c897a816db99f35c.zip | |
miscellaneous update
git-svn-id: http://svn.code.sf.net/p/netpbm/code/userguide@3864 9d0c8265-081b-0410-96cb-a4ca84ce46f8
82 files changed, 3693 insertions, 3724 deletions
diff --git a/411toppm.html b/411toppm.html index 4c146f01..158defa4 100644 --- a/411toppm.html +++ b/411toppm.html @@ -1,73 +1,72 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>411toppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>411toppm</H1> +<html><head><title>411toppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>411toppm</h1> Updated: 03 March 2001 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="ixAAB"></A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> 411toppm - convert Sony Mavica .411 image to PPM -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> -<B>411toppm</B> -[<B>-width </B><I>width</I>] -[<B>-height </B><I>height</I>] -[<I>411file</I>] +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<b>411toppm</b> +[<b>-width </b><i>width</i>] +[<b>-height </b><i>height</i>] +[<i>411file</i>] + +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p> <b>411toppm</b> reads a .411 file, such as from a Sony Mavic camera, and converts it to a PPM image as output. -<P> +<p> Output is to Standard Output. -<P> +<p> The originator of this program and decipherer of the .411 format, Steve Allen -<<A HREF="mailto:sla@alumni.caltech.edu">sla@alumni.caltech.edu</A>>, +<<a href="mailto:sla@alumni.caltech.edu">sla@alumni.caltech.edu</a>>, has this to say about the utility of this program: "There's so little image in a 64x48 thumbnail (especially when you have the full size JPG file) that the only point in doing this was to answer the implicit challenge posed by the manual stating that only the camera can use these files." -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>411toppm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<P> +<p> All options may be abbreviated to the shortest unique prefix. -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-width</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-width</b> -<DD> +<dd> The width (number of columns) of the input image. Default is 64. -<DT><B>-height</B> +<dt><b>-height</b> -<DD> +<dd> The height (number of rows) of the input image. Default is 48. -</DL> - -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A><H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +</dl> + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/leaftoppm.html b/leaftoppm.html index f7bfb73e..3880f3e8 100644 --- a/leaftoppm.html +++ b/leaftoppm.html @@ -1,50 +1,52 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Leaftoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>leaftoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Leaftoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>leaftoppm</h1> Updated: 01 June 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> leaftoppm - convert Interleaf image format to PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>leaftoppm</B> -[<I>leaffile</I>] +<b>leaftoppm</b> +[<i>leaffile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>leaftoppm</b> reads a PPM image as input and generates an Interleaf image file as output. -<P>Interleaf is a now-defunct (actually purchased ca. 2000 by +<p>Interleaf is a now-defunct (actually purchased ca. 2000 by BroadVision) technical publishing software company. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>leaftoppm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>The program is copyright (C) 1994 by Bill O'Donnell. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A><H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/lispmtopgm.html b/lispmtopgm.html index aa3875e9..b9616dcc 100644 --- a/lispmtopgm.html +++ b/lispmtopgm.html @@ -1,44 +1,46 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Lispmtopgm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>lispmtopgm</H1> +<html><head><title>Lispmtopgm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>lispmtopgm</h1> Updated: 06 March 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> lispmtopgm - convert a Lisp Machine bitmap file to PGM -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>lispmtopgm</B> -[<I>lispmfile</I>] +<b>lispmtopgm</b> +[<i>lispmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>listpmfile</b> reads a Lisp Machine bitmap as input and produces a PGM image as output. -<P>This is the file format written by the tv:write-bit-array-file +<p>This is the file format written by the tv:write-bit-array-file function on TI Explorer and Symbolics lisp machines. -<P>Multi-plane bitmaps on lisp machines are color; but the Lispm image +<p>Multi-plane bitmaps on lisp machines are color; but the Lispm image file format does not include a color map, so we must treat it as a monochrome instead and produce PGM. This is unfortunate. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pgmtolispm.html">pgmtolispm</A>, -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>lispmtopgm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pgmtolispm.html">pgmtolispm</a>, +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> + +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> The Lispm bitmap file format is a bit quirky; Usually the image in the file has its width rounded up to the next higher multiple of 32, but not always. @@ -46,26 +48,25 @@ If the width is not a multiple of 32, we don't deal with it properly, but because of the Lispm microcode, such arrays are probably not image data anyway. -<P>Also, the Lispm code for saving bitmaps has a bug, in that if you +<p>Also, the Lispm code for saving bitmaps has a bug, in that if you are writing a bitmap which is not mod32 across, the file may be up to 7 bits too short! They round down instead of up, and we don't handle this bug gracefully. -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<P>Copyright (C) 1991 by Jamie Zawinski and Jef Poskanzer. +<p>Copyright (C) 1991 by Jamie Zawinski and Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A><H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">BUGS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/macptopbm.html b/macptopbm.html index 91cfcee0..30cff82b 100644 --- a/macptopbm.html +++ b/macptopbm.html @@ -1,73 +1,70 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Macptopbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>macptopbm</H1> +<html><head><title>Macptopbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>macptopbm</h1> Updated: 29 March 1989 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> macptopbm - convert a MacPaint file into a PBM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>macptopbm</B> [<B>-extraskip</B> <I>N</I>] [<I>macpfile</I>] +<b>macptopbm</b> [<b>-extraskip</b> <i>N</i>] [<i>macpfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>macptopbm</b>reads a MacPaint file as input and produces a PBM image as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<P>You can abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>macptopbm</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-extraskip</B> +<p>You can abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. -<DD>This option is to get around a problem with some methods of +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-extraskip</b> + +<dd>This option is to get around a problem with some methods of transferring files from the Mac world to the Unix world. Most of these methods leave the Mac files alone, but a few of them add the "finderinfo" data onto the front of the Unix file. This means an extra 128 bytes to skip over when reading the file. The symptom to watch for is that the resulting PBM file looks shifted to -one side. If you get this, try <B>-extraskip</B> 128, and if that +one side. If you get this, try <b>-extraskip</b> 128, and if that still doesn't look right try another value. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="picttoppm.html">picttoppm</A>, -<A HREF="pbmtomacp.html">pbmtomacp</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<a href="picttoppm.html">picttoppm</a>, +<a href="pbmtomacp.html">pbmtomacp</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988 by Jef Poskanzer. The MacPaint-reading code is copyright (c) 1987 by Patrick J. Naughton -(<A HREF="mailto:naughton@wind.sun.com">naughton@wind.sun.com</A>). - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +(<a href="mailto:naughton@wind.sun.com">naughton@wind.sun.com</a>). + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/mdatopbm.html b/mdatopbm.html index 8edf70e4..45f2ddb8 100644 --- a/mdatopbm.html +++ b/mdatopbm.html @@ -1,28 +1,25 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Mdatopbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>mdatopbm</H1> +<html><head><title>Mdatopbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>mdatopbm</h1> Updated: 3 December 2003 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> mdatopbm - convert a Microdesign .mda or .mdp file into a PBM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>mdatopbm</B> -[<B>-a</B>] -[<B>-d</B>] -[<B>-i</B>] -[<B>--</B>] -[<I>mdafile</I>] +<b>mdatopbm</b> +[<b>-a</b>] +[<b>-d</b>] +[<b>-i</b>] +[<b>--</b>] +[<i>mdafile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -32,50 +29,51 @@ PBM image as output. <p>If you don't specify <i>mdafile</i>, <b>mdatopbm</b> takes its input from Standard Input. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-a</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>mdatopbm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Generate Plain PBM output instead of Raw PBM +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-a</b> -<DT><B>-d</B> +<dd>Generate Plain PBM output instead of Raw PBM -<DD>Double the height of the output file, to compensate for the aspect +<dt><b>-d</b> + +<dd>Double the height of the output file, to compensate for the aspect ratio used in MicroDesign files. -<DT><B>-i</B> +<dt><b>-i</b> -<DD>Invert the colors used. +<dd>Invert the colors used. -<DT><B>--</B> +<dt><b>--</b> -<DD>End of options (use this if the filename starts with "-") +<dd>End of options (use this if the filename starts with "-") -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pbmtomda.html">pbmtomda</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> +<a href="pbmtomda.html">pbmtomda</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Copyright (C) 1999 John Elliott <<A -HREF="mailto:jce@seasip.demon.co.uk">jce@seasip.demon.co.uk</A>>. +Copyright (C) 1999 John Elliott <<a +href="mailto:jce@seasip.demon.co.uk">jce@seasip.demon.co.uk</a>>. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A><H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/mrf.html b/mrf.html index b2ee9afa..3a25c643 100644 --- a/mrf.html +++ b/mrf.html @@ -1,20 +1,19 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>MRF image format specification</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<html><head><title>MRF image format specification</title></head> +<body> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H1>MRF format</H1> +<h1>MRF format</h1> Updated: 1991 -<BR> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<h2>NAME</h2> MRF - monochrome recursive format (compressed bitmaps) -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> -<p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. +<p>This document describes the MRF format supported by +<a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p>MRF is a compressed format for bilevel (1-bit mono) images. It achieves better compression for some such images than either GIF or @@ -22,48 +21,48 @@ PNG. (It's also very easy to implement (about the same difficulty as RLE, I'd say) and an MRF reader needs no tables/buffers, which may make it useful for tiny machines). -<P>In case the above hasn't made it sufficiently clear, I'll make this +<p>In case the above hasn't made it sufficiently clear, I'll make this next point explicitly: <em>MRF cannot represent color at all.</em> Nor can it represent grayscale. It's a specifically mono format. (If you want to compress a color or grayscale image, my advice is to use JPEG2000). -<P>First, here's what goes where in an MRF file. I'll explain how the +<p>First, here's what goes where in an MRF file. I'll explain how the compression works afterward. -<DL COMPACT> -<DT>Offset<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt>Offset<dd> Description -<DT>0 -<DD> +<dt>0 +<dd> magic number - "MRF1" (in ASCII) -<DT>4 -<DD> +<dt>4 +<dd> width (32-bit, MSB first (i.e. big-endian)) -<DT>8 -<DD> +<dt>8 +<dd> height (same) -<DT>12 -<DD> +<dt>12 +<dd> reserved (single byte, must be zero) -<DT>13 -<DD> +<dt>13 +<dd> compressed data -</DL> +</dl> -<P>Note that there is no end-of-file marker in the file itself - the +<p>Note that there is no end-of-file marker in the file itself - the compressed data carries on right up to EOF. -<P>The way the picture is compressed is essentially very simple, but +<p>The way the picture is compressed is essentially very simple, but as they say, the devil is in the detail. So don't be put off if it sounds confusing. -<P>The image is treated as a number of 64x64 squares, forming a grid +<p>The image is treated as a number of 64x64 squares, forming a grid large enough to encompass it. (If an image is (say) 129x65, it'll be treated in the same way as a 192x128 one. On decompression, the extra area which was encoded (the contents of this area is undefined) should @@ -72,37 +71,37 @@ top-to-bottom order) is recursively subdivided until the smallest completely black or white squares are found. Some pseudocode (eek!) for the recursive subdivision routine should make things clearer: -<PRE> +<pre> if square size > 1x1 and square is all one color, output 1 bit if whole square is black, output a 0 bit and return if whole square is white, output a 1 bit and return output a 0 bit divide the square into four quarters, calling routine for each in this order: top-left, top-right, bottom-left, bottom-right -</PRE> +</pre> -<P>(Note that the "output a 0 bit" stage is not reached for squares +<p>(Note that the "output a 0 bit" stage is not reached for squares of size 1x1, which is what stops it recursing infinitely. I mention this as it may not be immediately obvious.) -<P>The whole of the compressed data is made up of the bits output by +<p>The whole of the compressed data is made up of the bits output by the above routine. The bits are packed into bytes MSB first, so for example outputting the bits 1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0 would result in a 80h byte being output. Any `unused' bits in the last byte output are undefined; these are effectively after EOF and their value is unimportant. -<P>If writing that sounds too much like hard work :-), you could +<p>If writing that sounds too much like hard work :-), you could always adapt <b>pbmtomrf</b> and/or <b>mrftopbm</b>. That's the main reason their source code is public domain, after all. -<P>Above, I said the contents of any extra area encoded (when a bitmap +<p>Above, I said the contents of any extra area encoded (when a bitmap smaller than the grid of squares is compressed) is undefined. This is deliberate so that the MRF compressor can make these unseen areas anything it wants so as to maximize compression, rather than simply leaving it blank. <b>pbmtomrf</b> does a little in this respect but could definitely be improved upon. -<P><b>mrftopbm</b>'s <b>-1</b> option causes it to include the edges, if +<p><b>mrftopbm</b>'s <b>-1</b> option causes it to include the edges, if any, in the output PBM. This may help when debugging a compressor's edge optimization. @@ -111,24 +110,21 @@ because it is the name of a format. That sort of makes "MRF format" sound as stupid as "PIN number," but it's not really that bad. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="mrftopbm.html">mrftopbm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtomrf.html">pbmtomrf</A></B> +<b><a href="mrftopbm.html">mrftopbm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbmtomrf.html">pbmtomrf</a></b> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Russell Marks. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A><H2>Index</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/mrftopbm.html b/mrftopbm.html index 626b4da5..e1b81b6c 100644 --- a/mrftopbm.html +++ b/mrftopbm.html @@ -1,26 +1,24 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Mrftopbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>mrftopbm</H1> -<BR> +<html><head><title>Mrftopbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>mrftopbm</h1> +<br> Updated: 10 August 2003 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> mrftopbm - convert an MRF image to PBM format -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>mrftopbm</B> +<b>mrftopbm</b> [ <b>-a</b> ] -[ <I>input.mrf</I> ] +[ <i>input.mrf</i> ] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -30,12 +28,16 @@ mrftopbm - convert an MRF image to PBM format <i>input.mrf</i> argument, or Standard Input if you don't specify <i>input.mrf</i>. The output goes to Standard Output. -<P>For more information about mrf, see <A HREF="mrf.html">the MRF -specification</A>. +<p>For more information about mrf, see <a href="mrf.html">the MRF +specification</a>. + +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>mrftopbm</b> recognizes the following +command line option: <dl compact> <dt><b>-a</b> @@ -44,34 +46,25 @@ causes <b>mrftopbm</b> to include the edges, if any, in the output PBM. This may help when debugging a compressor's edge optimization. </dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> - - -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Russell Marks. +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> - -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pbmtomrf.html">pbmtomrf</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="mrf.html">mrf</A></B> +<b><a href="pbmtomrf.html">pbmtomrf</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, +<b><a href="mrf.html">mrf</a></b> -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/mtvtoppm.html b/mtvtoppm.html index 33acadb9..05d5e011 100644 --- a/mtvtoppm.html +++ b/mtvtoppm.html @@ -1,24 +1,21 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Mtvtoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>mtvtoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Mtvtoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>mtvtoppm</h1> Updated: 02 February 1989 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> mtvtoppm - convert output from an MTV or PRT ray tracer into a PPM -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>mtvtoppm</B> -[<I>mtvfile</I>] +<b>mtvtoppm</b> +[<i>mtvfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -27,25 +24,29 @@ ray tracer and produces a PPM image as output. <p>The PRT raytracer also produces this format. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>mtvtoppm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/neotoppm.html b/neotoppm.html index 383b78d2..a6469b9f 100644 --- a/neotoppm.html +++ b/neotoppm.html @@ -1,56 +1,57 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Neotoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>neotoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Neotoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>neotoppm</h1> Updated: 24 April 2001 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> neotoppm - convert an Atari Neochrome .neo into a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>neotoppm</B> -[<I>neofile</I>] +<b>neotoppm</b> +[<i>neofile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>neotoppm</b> reads an Atari Neochrome .neo file as input and produces a PPM image as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmtoneo.html">ppmtoneo</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>neotoppm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<b><a href="ppmtoneo.html">ppmtoneo</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -Copyright (C) 2001 by Teemu Hukkanen <<A -HREF="mailto:tjhukkan@iki.fi">tjhukkan@iki.fi</A>>, based on -pi1toppm by Steve Belczyk (<A -HREF="mailto:seb3@gte.com">seb3@gte.com</A>) and Jef Poskanzer. +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> +Copyright (C) 2001 by Teemu Hukkanen <<a +href="mailto:tjhukkan@iki.fi">tjhukkan@iki.fi</a>>, based on +pi1toppm by Steve Belczyk (<a +href="mailto:seb3@gte.com">seb3@gte.com</a>) and Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> + + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamaddnoise.html b/pamaddnoise.html index a151675b..3121c22e 100644 --- a/pamaddnoise.html +++ b/pamaddnoise.html @@ -1,89 +1,88 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamaddnoise User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamaddnoise</H1> +<html><head><title>Pamaddnoise User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamaddnoise</h1> Updated: 14 November 1995 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamaddnoise - add noise to a Netpbm image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamaddnoise</B> +<b>pamaddnoise</b> -[<B>-type</B> <I>noise_type</I>] +[<b>-type</b> <i>noise_type</i>] -[<B>-seed</B> <I>int</I>] +[<b>-seed</b> <i>int</i>] -<BR> +<br> -<B>pamaddnoise</B> <B>-type</B> <B>gaussian</B> +<b>pamaddnoise</b> <b>-type</b> <b>gaussian</b> -[<B>-sigma1</B> <I>value</I>] +[<b>-sigma1</b> <i>value</i>] -[<B>-sigma2</B> <I>value</I>] +[<b>-sigma2</b> <i>value</i>] -<BR> +<br> -[<B>-seed</B> <I>int</I>] +[<b>-seed</b> <i>int</i>] -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] -<BR> +<br> -<B>pamaddnoise</B> <B>-type </B> <B>multiplicative_gaussian</B> +<b>pamaddnoise</b> <b>-type </b> <b>multiplicative_gaussian</b> -[<B>-mgsigma</B> <I>value</I>] +[<b>-mgsigma</b> <i>value</i>] -<BR> +<br> -[<B>-seed</B> <I>int</I>] +[<b>-seed</b> <i>int</i>] -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] -<BR> +<br> -<B>pamaddnoise</B> <B>-type</B> <B>impulse</B> +<b>pamaddnoise</b> <b>-type</b> <b>impulse</b> -[<B>-tolerance</B> <i>ratio</I>] +[<b>-tolerance</b> <i>ratio</i>] -[<B>-seed</B> <I>int</I>] +[<b>-seed</b> <i>int</i>] -<BR> +<br> -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] -<BR> +<br> -<B>pamaddnoise</B> <B>-type </B> <B>laplacian</B> +<b>pamaddnoise</b> <b>-type </b> <b>laplacian</b> -[<B>-lsigma</B> <I>value</I>] +[<b>-lsigma</b> <i>value</i>] -[<B>-seed</B> <I>int</I>] +[<b>-seed</b> <i>int</i>] -<BR> +<br> -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] -<BR> +<br> -<B>pamaddnoise</B> <B>-type </B> <B>poisson</B> +<b>pamaddnoise</b> <b>-type </b> <b>poisson</b> -[<B>-lambda</B> <I>value</I>] +[<b>-lambda</b> <i>value</i>] -[<B>-seed</B> <I>int</I>] +[<b>-seed</b> <i>int</i>] -<BR> +<br> -[<I>netpbmfile</I>] +[<i>netpbmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -92,45 +91,50 @@ pamaddnoise - add noise to a Netpbm image a plane of colors in a color space. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-lambda</b> <i>value</i> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamaddnoise</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Used for poisson noise only. The default value is 0.05. +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-lambda</b> <i>value</i> -<DT><B>-lsigma</b> <i>value</i> +<dd>Used for poisson noise only. The default value is 0.05. -<DD>Used for laplacian noise only. The default value is 10.0. +<dt><b>-lsigma</b> <i>value</i> -<DT><B>-mgsigma</b> <i>value</i> +<dd>Used for laplacian noise only. The default value is 10.0. -<DD>Used for multiplicative gaussian noise only. The default value is +<dt><b>-mgsigma</b> <i>value</i> + +<dd>Used for multiplicative gaussian noise only. The default value is 0.5. -<DT><B>-seed</b> <i>int</i> +<dt><b>-seed</b> <i>int</i> -<DD>Used for all noise types. Set the initial random number generator +<dd>Used for all noise types. Set the initial random number generator seed value. -<DT><B>-sigma1</b> <i>value</i> +<dt><b>-sigma1</b> <i>value</i> -<DD>Used for gaussian noise only. The default value is 4.0. +<dd>Used for gaussian noise only. The default value is 4.0. -<DT><B>-sigma2</b> <i>value</i> +<dt><b>-sigma2</b> <i>value</i> -<DD>Used for gaussian noise only. The default value is 20.0. +<dd>Used for gaussian noise only. The default value is 20.0. -<DT><B>-tolerance</b> <i>ratio</i> +<dt><b>-tolerance</b> <i>ratio</i> -<DD> +<dd> Used for impulse noise only. The default value is 0.10. This means that 5% of all pixel values will be set to 0 and 5% will be set to the maxval -<DT><B>-type</b> <i>noise_type</i> +<dt><b>-type</b> <i>noise_type</i> -<DD> +<dd> Select type of noise by name. The following noise types are available: gaussian, multiplicative_gaussian, impulse, laplacian, poisson. Only enough letters to be unique are required for the noise @@ -144,31 +148,31 @@ type option. The default noise type is <b>gaussian</b>. <li><b>poisson</b> </ul> -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="references">REFERENCES</H2> +<h2 id="references">REFERENCES</h2> -<UL> -<LI>"Adaptive Image Restoration in Signal-Dependent Noise" +<ul> +<li>"Adaptive Image Restoration in Signal-Dependent Noise" by R. Kasturi Institute for Electronic Science, Texas Tech University, 1982 -<LI>"Digital Image Processing Algorithms" by Ioannis Pitas, +<li>"Digital Image Processing Algorithms" by Ioannis Pitas, Prentice Hall, 1993 ISBN 0-13-145814-0 -</UL> +</ul> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pgmnoise.html">pgmnoise</A>, -<A HREF="pgmmedian.html">pgmmedian</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A>, -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A>, +<a href="pgmnoise.html">pgmnoise</a>, +<a href="pgmmedian.html">pgmmedian</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a>, +<a href="pam.html">pam</a>, <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P><b>pamaddnoise</b> was added to Netpbm in Version 10.29 (August 2005). +<p><b>pamaddnoise</b> was added to Netpbm in Version 10.29 (August 2005). It had been distributed by Mike Burns via his own web site before that (and continued to be so). @@ -177,22 +181,21 @@ and worked only on PNM images. In Netpbm 10.30, it was converted to handle PAM images and renamed to <b>pamaddnoise</b>. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> - -Copyright (C) 1995 by Mike Burns <<A -HREF="mailto:burns@cac.psu.edu">burns@cac.psu.edu</A>> - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#references">REFERENCES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Copyright (C) 1995 by Mike Burns <<a +href="mailto:burns@cac.psu.edu">burns@cac.psu.edu</a>> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#references">REFERENCES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamdeinterlace.html b/pamdeinterlace.html index 62991a95..ddfd5e06 100644 --- a/pamdeinterlace.html +++ b/pamdeinterlace.html @@ -1,47 +1,44 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamdeinterlace User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamdeinterlace</H1> +<html><head><title>Pamdeinterlace User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamdeinterlace</h1> Updated: 11 November 2001 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamdeinterlace - remove every other row from a PAM/PNM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamdeinterlace</B> +<b>pamdeinterlace</b> -[<B>-takeodd</B>] +[<b>-takeodd</b>] -[<B>-takeeven</B>] +[<b>-takeeven</b>] -[<I>infile</I>] +[<i>infile</i>] -<P>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You +<p>You can use the minimum unique abbreviation of the options. You can use two hyphens instead of one. You can separate an option name from its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<p><B>pamdeinterlace</B> removes all the even-numbered or odd-numbered +<p><b>pamdeinterlace</b> removes all the even-numbered or odd-numbered rows from the input PNM or PAM image. Specify which with the -<B>-takeeven</B> and <B>-takeodd</B> options. +<b>-takeeven</b> and <b>-takeodd</b> options. -<P>This can be useful if the image is a video capture from an +<p>This can be useful if the image is a video capture from an interlaced video source. In that case, each row shows the subject 1/60 second before or after the two rows that surround it. If the subject is moving, this can detract from the quality of the image. -<P>Because the resulting image is half the height of the input image, -you will then want to use <B>pamstretch</B> or <B>pamscale</B> to +<p>Because the resulting image is half the height of the input image, +you will then want to use <b>pamstretch</b> or <b>pamscale</b> to restore it to its normal height: <pre> @@ -54,44 +51,45 @@ pamdeinterlace myimage.ppm | pamstretch -yscale=2 >newimage.ppm <b>pammixinterlace</b>. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamdeinterlace</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DT><B>-takeodd</B> +<dl compact> -<DD>Take the odd-numbered rows from the input and put them in the +<dt><b>-takeodd</b> + +<dd>Take the odd-numbered rows from the input and put them in the output. The rows are numbered starting at zero, so the first row in the output is the second row from the input. You cannot specify both -<B>-takeeven</B> and <B>-takeodd</B>. +<b>-takeeven</b> and <b>-takeodd</b>. -<DT><B>-takeeven</B> +<dt><b>-takeeven</b> -<DD>Take the even-numbered rows from the input and put them in the +<dd>Take the even-numbered rows from the input and put them in the output. The rows are numbered starting at zero, so the first row in the output is the first row from the input. This is the default. You -cannot specify both <B>-takeeven</B> and <B>-takeodd</B>. - -</DL> - -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - - -<B><A HREF="pammixinterlace.html">pammixinterlace</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +cannot specify both <b>-takeeven</b> and <b>-takeodd</b>. + +</dl> + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + + +<b><a href="pammixinterlace.html">pammixinterlace</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamoil.html b/pamoil.html index 5ce61f31..f58a7a7e 100644 --- a/pamoil.html +++ b/pamoil.html @@ -1,94 +1,91 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamoil User Manual</TITLE> -</HEAD><BODY> -<H1>pamoil</H1> +<html><head><title>Pamoil User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamoil</h1> Updated: 25 June 2001 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamoil - turn a PAM image into an oil painting -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamoil</B> +<b>pamoil</b> -[<B>-n</B> <I>N</I>] +[<b>-n</b> <i>N</i>] -[<I>pamfile</I>] +[<i>pamfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pamoil</b> reads a Netpbm image as input and does an "oil transfer", and writes the same type of Netpbm image as output. -<P>The oil transfer is described in "Beyond Photography" by +<p>The oil transfer is described in "Beyond Photography" by Holzmann, chapter 4, photo 7. It's a sort of localized smearing. -<P>The smearing works like this: First, assume a grayscale image. For -each pixel in the image, <B>pamoil</B> looks at a square neighborhood -around it. <B>pamoil</B> determines what is the most common pixel +<p>The smearing works like this: First, assume a grayscale image. For +each pixel in the image, <b>pamoil</b> looks at a square neighborhood +around it. <b>pamoil</b> determines what is the most common pixel intensity in the neighborhood, and puts a pixel of that intensity into the output in the same position as the input pixel. -<P>For color images, or any arbitrary multi-channel image, -<B>pamoil</B> computes each channel (e.g. red, green, and blue) +<p>For color images, or any arbitrary multi-channel image, +<b>pamoil</b> computes each channel (e.g. red, green, and blue) separately the same way as the grayscale case above. -<P>At the edges of the image, where the regular neighborhood would run -off the edge of the image, <B>pamoil</B> uses a clipped neighborhood. +<p>At the edges of the image, where the regular neighborhood would run +off the edge of the image, <b>pamoil</b> uses a clipped neighborhood. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-n</B> <I>size</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamoil</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DD>This is the size of the neighborhood used in the smearing. The +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-n</b> <i>size</i> + +<dd>This is the size of the neighborhood used in the smearing. The neighborhood is this many pixels in all four directions. -<P>The default is 3. +<p>The default is 3. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pgmbentley.html">pgmbentley</A></B>, +<b><a href="pgmbentley.html">pgmbentley</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppmrelief.html">ppmrelief</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppmrelief.html">ppmrelief</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<P> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<p> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>This program is based on pgmoil Copyright (C) 1990 by Wilson Bent -(<A HREF="mailto:whb@hoh-2.att.com">whb@hoh-2.att.com</A>) +(<a href="mailto:whb@hoh-2.att.com">whb@hoh-2.att.com</a>) -<P>Modified to ppm by Chris Sheppard, June 25, 2001 +<p>Modified to ppm by Chris Sheppard, June 25, 2001 -<P>Modified to pnm, using pam functions, by Bryan Henderson June 28, +<p>Modified to pnm, using pam functions, by Bryan Henderson June 28, 2001. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamseq.html b/pamseq.html index 685f1e5f..b30a0fe0 100644 --- a/pamseq.html +++ b/pamseq.html @@ -1,53 +1,57 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><title>Pamseq User Manual</title></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamseq</H1> -<BR> +<html><head><title>Pamseq User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamseq</h1> +<br> Updated: 8 May 2002 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> pamseq - generate PAM image of all possible tuple values, in sequence -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamseq</B> -[<B>-tupletype=</B><I>tupletype</I>] -<I>depth</I> -<I>maxval</I> +<b>pamseq</b> +[<b>-tupletype=</b><i>tupletype</i>] +<i>depth</i> +<i>maxval</i> -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to designate an option. You may use either white space or an equals sign between an option name and its value. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><B>pamseq</B> generates a PAM image of a specified depth and specified +<p><b>pamseq</b> generates a PAM image of a specified depth and specified maxval that consists of a single row. The row consists of one tuple of every possible value, in order. -<P>For a depth of one, the order is simple: From 0 to maxval, going from +<p>For a depth of one, the order is simple: From 0 to maxval, going from left to right. For higher depths, the highest numbered plane goes from 0 to maxval (going left to right) while all the other planes have value 0. Then the sequence repeats except with the next highest plane set to a value of 1, then 2, etc. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamseq</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-tupletype</B> -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-tupletype</b> +<dd> This is the value of the "tuple_type" attribute of the created PAM image. It can be any string up to 255 characters. -</DL> +</dl> - -<H2 id="usage">USAGE</H2> +<h2 id="usage">USAGE</h2> <p>To create a simple ramp of the values 0..255, for input to various matrix calculations, try @@ -59,7 +63,7 @@ calculations, try (Before <b>pamseq</b> existed, <b>pgmramp</b> was often pressed into service for this). -<P>To create a PPM color map of all the possible colors representable with a +<p>To create a PPM color map of all the possible colors representable with a maxval of 5, do <pre> <kbd> @@ -77,26 +81,27 @@ of the set of "web safe" colors as defined by Netscape. Most web browsers guarantee that they can produce at least these 216 colors (215 plus black). -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b> -<B><A HREF="pnmremap.html">pnmremap</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> <b>pamseq</b> was added to Netpbm in June 2002. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#usage">USAGE</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#usage">USAGE</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamsharpmap.html b/pamsharpmap.html index 0cd4c4ed..b671941c 100644 --- a/pamsharpmap.html +++ b/pamsharpmap.html @@ -1,22 +1,19 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamsharpmap User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamsharpmap</H1> +<html><head><title>Pamsharpmap User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamsharpmap</h1> Updated: 07 February 2004 -<BR> +<br> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamsharpmap - create map of sharpness in a PNM/PAM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> -<B>pamsharpmap</B> [<I>imagefile</I>] +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> +<b>pamsharpmap</b> [<i>imagefile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -47,17 +44,22 @@ meaningful. <p>The output image is the same dimensions, depth, and tuple type as the input, and has maxval 255. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamsharpness.html">pamsharpness</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pammasksharpen.html">pammasksharpen</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamedge.html">pamedge</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pamsharpmap</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="history"></A> -<h2>HISTORY</h2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pamsharpness.html">pamsharpness</a></b>, +<b><a href="pammasksharpen.html">pammasksharpen</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamedge.html">pamedge</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b> + +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pamsharpmap</b> was added to Netpbm in Release 10.21 (March 2004). Bryan Henderson derived it from the program <b>pnmsharp</b> by @@ -65,15 +67,14 @@ B.W. van Schooten and distributed as part of the Photopnmtools package. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF=#history>HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamsummcol.html b/pamsummcol.html index 78e7207d..aeaec9b4 100644 --- a/pamsummcol.html +++ b/pamsummcol.html @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamsummcol User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pamsummcol</H1> +<html><head><title>Pamsummcol User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamsummcol</h1> Updated: 25 January 2009 -<BR> +<br> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamsummcol - summarize (sum, average, etc) a Netpbm image by column -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> -<B>pamsummcol</B> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> +<b>pamsummcol</b> { <b>-sum</b> | <b>-mean</b> | <b>-min</b> | <b>-max</b> } -[<I>imagefile</I>] +[<i>imagefile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -64,54 +64,59 @@ to light intensity, and then use <b>pamsummcol</b> on the result. horizontally at all. Use the pixel mixing method. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamsummcol</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <p>You must specify exactly one of <b>-sum</b>, <b>-mean</b>, <b>-min</b>, or <b>-max</b>. -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-sum</b> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-sum</b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the summary function addition. +<dd> + <p>This option makes the summary function addition. In each column and plane of the output row, the sample value is the sum of all the samples values in the same column and plane of the input. If a result is greater than the image maxval, it is clipped to the maxval. -<DT><B>-mean</b> +<dt><b>-mean</b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the summary function arithmetic mean. +<dd> + <p>This option makes the summary function arithmetic mean. In each column and plane of the output row, the sample value is the mean of all the samples values in the same column and plane of the input. -<DT><B>-min</b> +<dt><b>-min</b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the summary function arithmetic minimum. +<dd> + <p>This option makes the summary function arithmetic minimum. In each column and plane of the output row, the sample value is the minimum of all the samples values in the same column and plane of the input. -<DT><B>-max</b> +<dt><b>-max</b> -<DD> - <P>This option makes the summary function arithmetic maximum. +<dd> + <p>This option makes the summary function arithmetic maximum. In each column and plane of the output row, the sample value is the maximum of all the samples values in the same column and plane of the input. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamsumm.html">pamsumm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamflip.html">pamflip</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamfunc.html">pamfunc</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamarith.html">pamarith</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamscale.html">pamscale</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pam.html">pam</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamsumm.html">pamsumm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamflip.html">pamflip</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamfunc.html">pamfunc</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamarith.html">pamarith</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a></b>, +<b><a href="pam.html">pam</a></b>, <h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> @@ -119,15 +124,14 @@ horizontally at all. Use the pixel mixing method. 2004). -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF=#history>HISTORY</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pamtouil.html b/pamtouil.html index 9e59393b..365f5dac 100644 --- a/pamtouil.html +++ b/pamtouil.html @@ -1,27 +1,24 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pamtouil User Manual</TITLE></HEAD><BODY> -<H1>pamtouil</H1> +<html><head><title>Pamtouil User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pamtouil</h1> Updated: 05 May 2002 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pamtouil - convert a PNM or PNM/transparency image into a Motif UIL icon file -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pamtouil</B> [<B>-name=</B><I>uilname</I>] [<I>pamfile</I>] +<b>pamtouil</b> [<b>-name=</b><i>uilname</i>] [<i>pamfile</i>] <p>You may abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one to delimit an option. You may separate an option from its value with whitespace instead of <b>=</b>. -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> - -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -31,59 +28,58 @@ grayscale or color image or grayscale+transparency or color+transparency. Where the transparency channel is present, <b>pamtouil</b> renders pixels that are more than half transparent as transparent in the output. -<P>In the UIL's colormap, <b>pamtouil</b> uses the color names from +<p>In the UIL's colormap, <b>pamtouil</b> uses the color names from the RGB database -- the same one <b><a href="ppmmake.html">ppmmake</a></b> uses. Where a color in the input does not exactly match one of the colors named in the RGB database, <b>pamtouil</b> uses the closest color named in the RGB database. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pamtouil</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> -<DT><B>-name</B> +<dt><b>-name</b> -<DD> +<dd> Allows you to specify the prefix string which is printed in the resulting UIL output. If not specified, will default to the filename - (without extension) of the ppmfile argument. If <B>-name</B> is not + (without extension) of the ppmfile argument. If <b>-name</b> is not specified and no ppmfile is specified (i.e. piped input), the prefix string will default to the string "noname". -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pamstack.html">pamstack</A> -<A HREF="pam.html">pam</A> -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="pamstack.html">pamstack</a> +<a href="pam.html">pam</a> +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> -<P>Before May 2002, <b>pamtouil</b> was called <b>ppmtouil</b> and had no +<p>Before May 2002, <b>pamtouil</b> was called <b>ppmtouil</b> and had no way to specify transparency. - -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Converted by Bryan Henderson from ppmtouil.c, which was converted by Jef Poskanzer from ppmtoxpm.c, which is Copyright (C) 1990 by Mark W. Snitily -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmmask.html b/pbmmask.html index a8337104..5d87a1b7 100644 --- a/pbmmask.html +++ b/pbmmask.html @@ -1,107 +1,104 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmmask User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmmask</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmmask User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmmask</h1> Updated: 08 August 1989 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmmask - create a mask bitmap from a regular bitmap -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmmask</B> -[<B>-expand</B>] -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmmask</b> +[<b>-expand</b>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmmask</b> reads a PBM image as input and Generates a corresponding mask of the foreground areas as another PBM image. -<P>The color to be interpreted as "background" is +<p>The color to be interpreted as "background" is determined automatically. Regardless of which color is background, the mask will be white where the background is and black where the figure is. -<P>This lets you do a masked paste like this, for objects with a black +<p>This lets you do a masked paste like this, for objects with a black background: -<PRE> +<pre> pbmmask obj > objmask pnmpaste < dest -and objmask <x> <y> | pnmpaste -or obj <x> <y> -</PRE> +</pre> For objects with a white background, you can either invert them or add a step: -<PRE> +<pre> pbmmask obj > objmask pnminvert objmask | pnmpaste -and obj 0 0 > blackback pnmpaste < dest -and objmask <x> <y> | pnmpaste -or blackback <x> <y> -</PRE> +</pre> Note that this three-step version works for objects with black backgrounds too, if you don't care about the wasted time. -<P>You can also use masks with grayscale and color images, using the -<I>pnmarith</I> tool. For instance: +<p>You can also use masks with grayscale and color images, using the +<i>pnmarith</i> tool. For instance: -<PRE> +<pre> ppmtopgm obj.ppm | pamditherbw -threshold | pbmmask > objmask.pbm pnmarith -multiply dest.ppm objmask.pbm > t1.ppm pnminvert objmask.pbm | pnmarith -multiply obj.ppm - > t2.ppm pnmarith -add t1.ppm t2.ppm -</PRE> +</pre> An interesting variation on this is to pipe the mask through -<I>pnmsmooth</I> before using it. This makes the boundary between the +<i>pnmsmooth</i> before using it. This makes the boundary between the two images less sharp. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-expand</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmmask</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DD>Expands the mask by one pixel out from the image. This is useful +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-expand</b> + +<dd>Expands the mask by one pixel out from the image. This is useful if you want a little white border around your image. (A better solution might be to turn the <b>pbmlife</b> program into a general cellular automaton tool...) -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmpaste.html">pnmpaste</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnminvert.html">pnminvert</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmarith.html">pnmarith</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmsmooth.html">pnmsmooth</A></B> -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, +<b><a href="ppmcolormask.html">ppmcolormask</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmpaste.html">pnmpaste</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnminvert.html">pnminvert</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmarith.html">pnmarith</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmsmooth.html">pnmsmooth</a></b> +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmto4425.html b/pbmto4425.html index d6948936..b6419fb7 100644 --- a/pbmto4425.html +++ b/pbmto4425.html @@ -1,71 +1,72 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmto4425 User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>Pbmto4425</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmto4425 User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>Pbmto4425</h1> Updated: 1994 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmto4425 - Display PBM images on an AT&T 4425 terminal -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmto4425</B> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmto4425</b> +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<B>pbmto4425</b> displays PBM format images on an AT&T 4425 ASCII +<b>pbmto4425</b> displays PBM format images on an AT&T 4425 ASCII terminal using that terminal's mosaic graphics character set. The program should also work with other VT100-like terminals with mosaic graphics character sets such as the C. Itoh CIT-101, but it has not yet been tested on terminals other than the 4425. -<P> <b>Pbmto4425</b> puts the terminal into 132 column mode to achieve +<p> <b>Pbmto4425</b> puts the terminal into 132 column mode to achieve the maximum resolution of the terminal. In this mode the terminal has a resolution of 264 columns by 69 rows. The pixels have an aspect ratio of 1:2.6, therefore an image should be processed before being displayed in a manner such as this: -<PRE> -<B>% pamscale -xscale 2.6 </B><I>pamfile</I> <B>\ +<pre> +<b>% pamscale -xscale 2.6 </b><i>pamfile</i> <b>\ | pamscale -xysize 264 69 \ | ppmtopgm \ | pamditherbw \ - | pbmto4425</B> -</PRE> + | pbmto4425</b> +</pre> -<A NAME="seealso"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<B><A HREF="pbmtoascii.html">pbmtoascii</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppmtoterm.html">ppmtoterm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmto4425</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pbmtoascii.html">pbmtoascii</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmtoterm.html">ppmtoterm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1993 by Robert Perlberg -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtobbnbg.html b/pbmtobbnbg.html index 22bee438..711b0c7d 100644 --- a/pbmtobbnbg.html +++ b/pbmtobbnbg.html @@ -1,62 +1,63 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtobbnbg User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtobbnbg</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtobbnbg User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtobbnbg</h1> Updated: 16 May 1989 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtobbnbg - convert a PBM image into BitGraph graphics -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtobbng</B> -[<I>rasterop</I>] -[<I>x</I> <I>y</I>] +<b>pbmtobbng</b> +[<i>rasterop</i>] +[<i>x</i> <i>y</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmtobbnbg</b> reads a portable bitmap as input and produces BBN BitGraph terminal Display Pixel Data (DPD) sequence as output. -<P> +<p> The rasterop can be specified on the command line. If this is omitted, 3 (replace) will be used. A position in (x,y) coordinates can also be specified. If both are given, the rasterop comes first. The portable bitmap is always taken from the standard input. -<P> +<p> Note that there is no bgtopbm tool. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtobbnbg</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright 1989 by Mike Parker. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtocmuwm.html b/pbmtocmuwm.html index 67e5d01a..84f4e9bf 100644 --- a/pbmtocmuwm.html +++ b/pbmtocmuwm.html @@ -1,49 +1,50 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtocmuwm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtocmuwm</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtocmuwm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtocmuwm</h1> Updated: 15 April 1989 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtocmuwm - convert a PBM image into a CMU window manager bitmap -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtocmuwm</B> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmtocmuwm</b> +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmtocmuwm</b> reads a portable bitmap as input and produces a CMU window manager bitmap as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="cmuwmtopbm.html">cmuwmtopbm</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtocmuwm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="cmuwmtopbm.html">cmuwmtopbm</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtoepsi.html b/pbmtoepsi.html index d6732425..025253b6 100644 --- a/pbmtoepsi.html +++ b/pbmtoepsi.html @@ -1,41 +1,36 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><title>Pbmtoepsi User Manual</title></HEAD> - -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtoepsi</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtoepsi User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtoepsi</h1> Updated: June 2002 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtoepsi - convert a PBM image to an encapsulated PostScript style preview bitmap -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtoepsi</B> -[<B>-dpi=</B><I>N</I>[<B>x</B><I>N</I>]] -[<B>-bbonly</B>] -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmtoepsi</b> +[<b>-dpi=</b><i>N</i>[<b>x</b><i>N</i>]] +[<b>-bbonly</b>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. You may use two hyphens instead of one. You may separate an option name and its value with white space instead of an equals sign. -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P>Reads a PBM image as input. Produces an encapsulated Postscript +<p>Reads a PBM image as input. Produces an encapsulated Postscript style bitmap as output. The output is not a stand alone postscript file, it is only a preview bitmap, which can be included in an encapsulated PostScript file. -<P><b>pbmtoepsi</b> assumes the PBM input describes a whole output +<p><b>pbmtoepsi</b> assumes the PBM input describes a whole output page, with one pixel on the page corresponding to one PBM pixel. It detects white borders in the image and generates Postscript output that contains a Bounding Box statement to describe the location of the @@ -43,16 +38,20 @@ principal image (the image excluding the white borders) on the page and thus does not include the borders in the raster part of the Postscript output. -<P>There is no <b>epsitopbm</b> tool - this transformation is one way. +<p>There is no <b>epsitopbm</b> tool - this transformation is one way. + +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtoepsi</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-dpi=</B><I>N</I>[<B>x</B><I>N</I>] +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-dpi=</b><i>N</i>[<b>x</b><i>N</i>] -<DD> - <P>This option specifies the resolution in dots per inch of the +<dd> + <p>This option specifies the resolution in dots per inch of the ultimate output device. You must specify this because the Bounding Box statement defines the bounding box in absolute distances, not in pixels. <b>pbmtoepsi</b> assumes in @@ -61,52 +60,48 @@ Postscript output. specification to calculate the size and location on the page of the bounding box. - <P>If you specify <I>N</I><B>x</B>N, the first number is the + <p>If you specify <i>N</i><b>x</b>N, the first number is the horizontal resolution and the second number is the vertical - resolution. If you specify just a single number <I>N</I>, that is the + resolution. If you specify just a single number <i>N</i>, that is the resolution in both directions. - <P>The default is 72 dots per inch in both directions. + <p>The default is 72 dots per inch in both directions. - <P>This option was new In Netpbm 10.3 (June 2002). Before that, + <p>This option was new In Netpbm 10.3 (June 2002). Before that, <b>pbmtoepsi</b> always assumed 72 dots per inch in both directions. -<DT><B>-bbonly</B> +<dt><b>-bbonly</b> -<DD> +<dd> Only create a boundary box, don't fill it with the image. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pnmtops.html">pnmtops</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmtops.html">pnmtops</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pstopnm.html">pstopnm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="psidtopgm.html">psidtopgm</A></B>, +<b><a href="psidtopgm.html">psidtopgm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtolps.html">pbmtolps</A></B>, +<b><a href="pbmtolps.html">pbmtolps</a></b>, Postscript language documentation -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988 Jef Poskanzer, modified by Doug Crabill 1992 -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtoepson.html b/pbmtoepson.html index 6895d334..4141b13a 100644 --- a/pbmtoepson.html +++ b/pbmtoepson.html @@ -1,29 +1,26 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtoepson User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtoepson</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtoepson User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtoepson</h1> Updated: 8 August 2003 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtoepson - convert a PBM image into Epson printer graphics -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtoepson</B> +<b>pbmtoepson</b> [<b>-dpi=</b><i>n</i>] -[<b>-protocol=</b>{<b>escp9</b>|<B>escp</B>}] +[<b>-protocol=</b>{<b>escp9</b>|<b>escp</b>}] [<b>-adjacent</b>] [<b>-nonadjacent</b>] -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -46,12 +43,16 @@ specification. <p>Note that there is no epsontopbm tool - this transformation is one way. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<dl COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtoepson</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<dt><b>-protocol=</b>{<b>escp9</b>|<B>escp</B>} +<dl compact> + +<dt><b>-protocol=</b>{<b>escp9</b>|<b>escp</b>} <dd>This determines which Epson printer protocol the output uses. <b>escp9</b> is the older ESC/P 9-pin protocol. <b>escp</b> is the @@ -87,29 +88,25 @@ printing unless that is incompatible with your other options. </dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pbmtoescp2.html">pbmtoescp2</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A>, +<a href="pbmtoescp2.html">pbmtoescp2</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a>, -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Copyright (C) 1991 by John Tiller (<A -HREF="mailto:tiller@galois.msfc.nasa.gov">tiller@galois.msfc.nasa.gov</A>) +Copyright (C) 1991 by John Tiller (<a +href="mailto:tiller@galois.msfc.nasa.gov">tiller@galois.msfc.nasa.gov</a>) and Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<li><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<li><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<li><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<li><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<li><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<li><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtogem.html b/pbmtogem.html index f92e81a0..2fa6b382 100644 --- a/pbmtogem.html +++ b/pbmtogem.html @@ -1,56 +1,56 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtogem User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtogem</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtogem User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtogem</h1> Updated: 11 July 1992 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtogem - convert a PBM image into a GEM .img file -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtogem</B> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmtogem</b> +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmtogem</b> reads a PBM image as input and produces a compressed GEM .img file as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtogem</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> pbmtogem does not support compression of repeated lines -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="gemtopbm.html">gemtopbm</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<a href="gemtopbm.html">gemtopbm</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988 by David Beckemeyer (bdt!david) and Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">BUGS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtogo.html b/pbmtogo.html index 59c4ac9c..6358199e 100644 --- a/pbmtogo.html +++ b/pbmtogo.html @@ -1,24 +1,21 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtogo User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtogo</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtogo User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtogo</h1> Updated: 24 November 1989 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtogo - convert a PBM image into compressed GraphOn graphics -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtogo</B> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmtogo</b> +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -30,25 +27,29 @@ no parity; obeys no XON/XOFF; NULs are accepted. These are all on the Comm menu. Also, remember to turn off tty post processing. Note that there is no gotopbm tool. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtogo</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988, 1989 by Jef Poskanzer, Michael Haberler, and Bo Thide'. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtoln03.html b/pbmtoln03.html index d5e07d4b..6fee1c6b 100644 --- a/pbmtoln03.html +++ b/pbmtoln03.html @@ -1,76 +1,73 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtoln03 User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtoln03</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtoln03 User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtoln03</h1> Updated: 7 May 1993 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtoln03 - convert PBM image to DEC LN03+ Sixel output -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtoln03</B> -[<B>-rltbf</B>] -<I>pbmfile</I> +<b>pbmtoln03</b> +[<b>-rltbf</b>] +<i>pbmfile</i> -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmtoln03</b> reads a PBM image as input and produces a DEC LN03+ Sixel output file. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-l nn</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtoln03</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Use "nn" as value for left margin (default 0). +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-l nn</b> -<DT><B>-r nn</B> +<dd>Use "nn" as value for left margin (default 0). -<DD>Use "nn" as value for right margin (default 2400). +<dt><b>-r nn</b> -<DT><B>-t nn</B> +<dd>Use "nn" as value for right margin (default 2400). -<DD>Use "nn" as value for top margin (default 0). +<dt><b>-t nn</b> -<DT><B>-b nn</B> +<dd>Use "nn" as value for top margin (default 0). -<DD>Use "nn" as value for bottom margin (default 3400). +<dt><b>-b nn</b> -<DT><B>-f nn</B> +<dd>Use "nn" as value for bottom margin (default 3400). -<DD>Use "nn" as value for form length (default 3400). +<dt><b>-f nn</b> -</DL> +<dd>Use "nn" as value for form length (default 3400). -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +</dl> -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Tim Cook, 26 Feb 1992 -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtomda.html b/pbmtomda.html index 0b2c6c51..2ae7fcfa 100644 --- a/pbmtomda.html +++ b/pbmtomda.html @@ -1,29 +1,26 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtomda User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtomda</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtomda User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtomda</h1> Updated: 3 June 1999 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtomda - convert a PBM image to a Microdesign .mda -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtomda</B> +<b>pbmtomda</b> -[<B>-d</B>] -[<B>-i</B>] -[<B>--</B>] +[<b>-d</b>] +[<b>-i</b>] +[<b>--</b>] [<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -32,53 +29,52 @@ produces a MicroDesign 2 area file (.MDA) as output. <p>If you do not specify <i>pbmfile</i>, <b>pbmtomda</b> uses Standard Input. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-d</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtomda</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-d</b> + +<dd> Halve the height of the output file, to compensate for the aspect ratio used in MicroDesign files. -<DT><B>-i</B> +<dt><b>-i</b> -<DD> +<dd> Invert the colors used. -<DT><B>--</B> +<dt><b>--</b> -<DD> +<dd> End of options (use this if the filename starts with "-") -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> There's no way to produce files in MicroDesign 3 format. MD3 itself and -<A HREF="mdatopbm.html">mdatopbm</A> can read files in either format. - -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="mdatopbm.html">mdatopbm</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> - -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> - -Copyright (C) 1999 John Elliott <<A HREF="mailto:jce@seasip.demon.co.uk">jce@seasip.demon.co.uk</A>>. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<a href="mdatopbm.html">mdatopbm</a> can read files in either format. + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="mdatopbm.html">mdatopbm</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Copyright (C) 1999 John Elliott <<a href="mailto:jce@seasip.demon.co.uk">jce@seasip.demon.co.uk</a>>. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtomrf.html b/pbmtomrf.html index 530a2013..076c792a 100644 --- a/pbmtomrf.html +++ b/pbmtomrf.html @@ -1,66 +1,62 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtomrf User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtomrf</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtomrf User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtomrf</h1> Updated: 1991 -<BR> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> + +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtomrf - convert a PBM format image to MRF -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtomrf</B> +<b>pbmtomrf</b> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmtomrf</b> converts a PBM image to MRF format. -<P>For more information about mrf, see <A HREF="mrf.html">the MRF -specification</A>. +<p>For more information about mrf, see <a href="mrf.html">the MRF +specification</a>. <p><b>pbmtomrf</b> takes the PBM image from the file named by the <i>input.pbm</i> argument, or Standard Input if you don't specify <i>input.pbm</i>. The output goes to Standard Output. -<P>The compression of the edges of pictures with width and/or height +<p>The compression of the edges of pictures with width and/or height not an exact multiple of 64 is not optimal in all cases. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> - -none. +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtomrf</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Russell Marks. -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<B><A HREF="pbmtomrf.html">pbmtomrf</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="mrf.html">mrf</A></B> - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<b><a href="pbmtomrf.html">pbmtomrf</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, +<b><a href="mrf.html">mrf</a></b> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtopgm.html b/pbmtopgm.html index d499ea9e..3add5ed6 100644 --- a/pbmtopgm.html +++ b/pbmtopgm.html @@ -1,84 +1,85 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtopgm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> +<html><head><title>Pbmtopgm User Manual</title></head> +<body> -<H1>pbmtopgm</H1> +<h1>pbmtopgm</h1> <p>Updated: 05 Feb 2003 -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtopgm - convert PBM image to PGM by averaging areas -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtopgm </B> -<I>width</I> -<I>height</I> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmtopgm </b> +<i>width</i> +<i>height</i> +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><B>pbmtopgm</B> reads a PBM image as input. It outputs a PGM image +<p><b>pbmtopgm</b> reads a PBM image as input. It outputs a PGM image in which each pixel's gray level is the average of the surrounding black and white input pixels. The surrounding area is a rectangle of -<I>width</I> by <I>height</I> pixels. +<i>width</i> by <i>height</i> pixels. -<P>In other words, this is a convolution. <B>pbmtopgm</B> is similar -to a special case of <B>pnmconvol</B>. +<p>In other words, this is a convolution. <b>pbmtopgm</b> is similar +to a special case of <b>pnmconvol</b>. -<P>You may need a <B>pnmsmooth</B> step after <B>pbmtopgm</B>. +<p>You may need a <b>pnmsmooth</b> step after <b>pbmtopgm</b>. -<P><B>pbmtopgm</B> has the effect of anti-aliasing bitmaps which +<p><b>pbmtopgm</b> has the effect of anti-aliasing bitmaps which contain distinct line features. -<P><B>pbmtopgm</B> works best with odd sample width and heights. +<p><b>pbmtopgm</b> works best with odd sample width and heights. -<P>You don't need <B>pbmtopgm</B> just to use a PGM program on a PBM +<p>You don't need <b>pbmtopgm</b> just to use a PGM program on a PBM image. Any PGM program (assuming it uses the Netpbm libraries to read the PGM input) takes PBM input as if it were PGM, with only the minimum and maximum gray levels. So unless your convolution rectangle is bigger than one pixel, you're not gaining anything with a -<B>pbmtopgm</B> step. +<b>pbmtopgm</b> step. <p>The opposite transformation (which would turn a PGM into a PBM) is dithering. See <b>pamditherbw</b>. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamditherbw.html">pamditherbw</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A></B> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtopgm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<P>Copyright (C) 1990 by Angus Duggan. -<P>Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. +<b><a href="pamditherbw.html">pamditherbw</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmconvol.html">pnmconvol</a></b>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgm.html">pgm</a></b> -<P>Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +<p>Copyright (C) 1990 by Angus Duggan. +<p>Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. + +<p>Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtopi3.html b/pbmtopi3.html index 5a7b153b..e9a7c911 100644 --- a/pbmtopi3.html +++ b/pbmtopi3.html @@ -1,51 +1,52 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtopi3 User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtopi3</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtopi3 User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtopi3</h1> Updated: 11 March 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtopi3 - convert a PBM image into an Atari Degas .pi3 file -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtopi3</B> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmtopi3</b> +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmtopi3</b> reads a PBM image as input and produces an Atari Degas .pi3 file as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pi3topbm.html">pi3topbm</A>, -<A HREF="ppmtopi1.html">ppmtopi1</A>, -<A HREF="pi1toppm.html">pi1toppm</A> -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A>, +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtopi3</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pi3topbm.html">pi3topbm</a>, +<a href="ppmtopi1.html">ppmtopi1</a>, +<a href="pi1toppm.html">pi1toppm</a> +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a>, + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988 by David Beckemeyer (bdt!david) and Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtopk.html b/pbmtopk.html index ccd3e9da..50bfd05b 100644 --- a/pbmtopk.html +++ b/pbmtopk.html @@ -1,17 +1,15 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtopk User Manual</TITLE> -</HEAD><BODY> -<H1>pbmtopk</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtopk User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtopk</h1> Updated: 6 August 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtopk - convert a PBM image into a packed (PK) format font -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <b>pbmtopk</b> <i>pkfile</i>[<b>.pk</b>] @@ -27,14 +25,13 @@ pbmtopk - convert a PBM image into a packed (PK) format font [<b>-H</b> <i>height</i>] [<b>-D</b> <i>depth</i>] [<b>-I</b> <i>ital</i>] -[<b>-h</b> <i>horiz</I>] +[<b>-h</b> <i>horiz</i>] [<b>-v</b> <i>vert</i>] [<b>-x</b> <i>xoff</i>] [<b>-y</b> <i>yoff</i>] [<i>pbmfile</i> ...] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -44,43 +41,47 @@ parameter indicates the resolution of the font, in dots per inch. If the filename "-" is used for any of the filenames, <b>pbmtopk</b> uses Standard Input or Standard Output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><b>-s</b> <i>designsize</i> -<DD> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pbmtopk</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-s</b> <i>designsize</i> +<dd> Sets the design size of the font, in TeX's points (72.27pt to the inch). The default design size is 1. The TFM parameters are given as multiples of the design size. -<DT><b>-p</b> <i>num</i> <i>param</i>... +<dt><b>-p</b> <i>num</i> <i>param</i>... -<DD>Sets the first num font parameters for the font. The first seven +<dd>Sets the first num font parameters for the font. The first seven parameters are the slant, interword spacing, interword space stretchability, interword space shrinkability, x-height, quad width, and post-sentence extra space of the font. Math and symbol fonts may have more parameters; see The TeXbook for a list of these. Reasonable default values are chosen for parameters which are not specified. -<DT><b>-C</b> <i>codingscheme</i> +<dt><b>-C</b> <i>codingscheme</i> -<DD> +<dd> Sets the coding scheme comment in the TFM file. -<DT><b>-F</b> <i>family</i><DD> +<dt><b>-F</b> <i>family</i><dd> Sets the font family comment in the TFM file. -<DT><b>-f</b> <i>optfile</i> +<dt><b>-f</b> <i>optfile</i> -<DD>Reads the file optfile, which should contain a lines of the form: +<dd>Reads the file optfile, which should contain a lines of the form: -<PRE> +<pre> filename xoff yoff horiz vert width height depth ital -</PRE> +</pre> -<P>The PBM files specified by the filename parameters are inserted +<p>The PBM files specified by the filename parameters are inserted consecutively in the font with the specified attributes. If any of the attributes are omitted, or replaced with "*", a default value will be calculated from the size of the bitmap. The settings of @@ -90,72 +91,68 @@ by including a line starting with "=", followed by the new number. Lines beginning with "%" or "#" are ignored. -<DT><B>-c</B> <I>num</I> -<DD>Sets the character number of the next bitmap encountered to num. +<dt><b>-c</b> <i>num</i> +<dd>Sets the character number of the next bitmap encountered to num. -<DT><B>-W</B> <I>width</I> +<dt><b>-W</b> <i>width</i> -<DD>Sets the TFM width of the next character to width (in design size +<dd>Sets the TFM width of the next character to width (in design size multiples). -<DT><B>-H</B> <I>height</I> +<dt><b>-H</b> <i>height</i> -<DD>Sets the TFM height of the next character to height (in design +<dd>Sets the TFM height of the next character to height (in design size multiples). -<DT><B>-D</B> <I>depth</I> +<dt><b>-D</b> <i>depth</i> -<DD>Sets the TFM depth of the next character to depth (in design size +<dd>Sets the TFM depth of the next character to depth (in design size multiples). -<DT><B>-I</B> <I>ital</I> +<dt><b>-I</b> <i>ital</i> -<DD>Sets the italic correction of the next character to ital (in +<dd>Sets the italic correction of the next character to ital (in design size multiples). -<DT><B>-h</B> <I>horiz</I> +<dt><b>-h</b> <i>horiz</i> -<DD>Sets the horizontal escapement of the next character to horiz (in +<dd>Sets the horizontal escapement of the next character to horiz (in pixels). -<DT><B>-v</B> <I>vert</I> +<dt><b>-v</b> <i>vert</i> -<DD>Sets the vertical escapement of the next character to vert (in pixels). +<dd>Sets the vertical escapement of the next character to vert (in pixels). -<DT><B>-x</B> <I>xoff</I> +<dt><b>-x</b> <i>xoff</i> -<DD>Sets the horizontal offset of the next character to xoff (in +<dd>Sets the horizontal offset of the next character to xoff (in pixels). -<DT><B>-y</B> <I>yoff</I> +<dt><b>-y</b> <i>yoff</i> -<DD>Sets the vertical offset of the next character to yoff (in pixels, +<dd>Sets the vertical offset of the next character to yoff (in pixels, from the top row). -</DL> - -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="pktopbm.html">pktopbm</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> - -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> - -<P>Adapted from Tom Rokicki's pxtopk by Angus Duggan <<A -HREF="mailto:ajcd@dcs.ed.ac.uk">ajcd@dcs.ed.ac.uk</A>>. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +</dl> + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pktopbm.html">pktopbm</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +<p>Adapted from Tom Rokicki's pxtopk by Angus Duggan <<a +href="mailto:ajcd@dcs.ed.ac.uk">ajcd@dcs.ed.ac.uk</a>>. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtoplot.html b/pbmtoplot.html index 97fe341a..e8187a49 100644 --- a/pbmtoplot.html +++ b/pbmtoplot.html @@ -1,52 +1,53 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtoplot User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtoplot</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtoplot User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtoplot</h1> Updated: 1 September 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtoplot - convert a PBM image into a Unix 'plot' file -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtoplot</B> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmtoplot</b> +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmtoplot</b> reads a PBM image as input and produces a Unix -<B>plot</B> file as output. +<b>plot</b> file as output. -<P> +<p> Note that there is no plottopbm tool - this transformation is one-way. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A>, +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtoplot</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a>, <b>plot</b>(1) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1990 by Arthur David Olson. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtoptx.html b/pbmtoptx.html index 2614d95b..68b9db26 100644 --- a/pbmtoptx.html +++ b/pbmtoptx.html @@ -1,50 +1,51 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtoptx User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtoptx</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtoptx User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtoptx</h1> Updated: 31 August 1988 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtoptx - convert a PBM image into Printronix printer graphics -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtoptx</B> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmtoptx</b> +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pbmtoptx</b> reads a PBM image as input and produces a file of Printronix printer graphics as output. -<P>Note that there is no ptxtopbm tool - this transformation is one way. +<p>Note that there is no ptxtopbm tool - this transformation is one way. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtoptx</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtowbmp.html b/pbmtowbmp.html index 833987fb..c34cfef0 100644 --- a/pbmtowbmp.html +++ b/pbmtowbmp.html @@ -1,59 +1,59 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtowbmp User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtowbmp</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtowbmp User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtowbmp</h1> Updated: 19 November 1999 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtowbmp - convert a PBM image to a wireless bitmap (wbmp) file -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtowbmp</B> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +<b>pbmtowbmp</b> +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><B>pbmtowbmp</b> reads a PBM image as input and +<p><b>pbmtowbmp</b> reads a PBM image as input and produces a wbmp file as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtowbmp</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> <p><b>pbmtowbmp</b> can generate only WBMP type 0. This is the only type specified in the WAP 1.1 specifications. -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="wbmptopbm.html">wbmptopbm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, +<b><a href="wbmptopbm.html">wbmptopbm</a></b>, -<B>Wireless Application Environment Specification</B>. +<b>Wireless Application Environment Specification</b>. -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Copyright (C) 1999 Terje Sannum <<A HREF="mailto:terje@looplab.com">terje@looplab.com</A>>. +Copyright (C) 1999 Terje Sannum <<a href="mailto:terje@looplab.com">terje@looplab.com</a>>. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pbmtozinc.html b/pbmtozinc.html index cf336d7b..025f905b 100644 --- a/pbmtozinc.html +++ b/pbmtozinc.html @@ -1,25 +1,22 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pbmtozinc User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pbmtozinc</H1> +<html><head><title>Pbmtozinc User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pbmtozinc</h1> Updated: 02 November 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pbmtozinc - convert a PBM image into a Zinc bitmap -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pbmtozinc</B> +<b>pbmtozinc</b> -[<I>pbmfile</I>] +[<i>pbmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -27,25 +24,29 @@ pbmtozinc - convert a PBM image into a Zinc bitmap in the format used by the Zinc Interface Library (ZIL) Version 1.0 as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pbmtozinc</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -Copyright (C) 1988 by James Darrell McCauley (<A HREF="mailto:jdm5548@diamond.tamu.edu">jdm5548@diamond.tamu.edu</A>) and Jef Poskanzer. +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Copyright (C) 1988 by James Darrell McCauley (<a href="mailto:jdm5548@diamond.tamu.edu">jdm5548@diamond.tamu.edu</a>) and Jef Poskanzer. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pc1toppm.html b/pc1toppm.html index 8a6335d5..dc142154 100644 --- a/pc1toppm.html +++ b/pc1toppm.html @@ -1,25 +1,22 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pc1toppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pc1toppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Pc1toppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pc1toppm</h1> Updated: 30 April 2004 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pc1toppm - convert an Atari Degas .pc1 into a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pc1toppm</B> +<b>pc1toppm</b> -[<I>pc1file</I>] +[<i>pc1file</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -28,28 +25,33 @@ produces a PPM image as output. <p>The .pc1 format is a compressed (run length encoded) variation on .pi1. -<A NAME="history"></a> -<h2>HISTORY</h2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pc1toppm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pc1toppm</b> was new in Netpbm 10.22 (April 2004) -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A>, -<A HREF="pi1toppm.html">pi1toppm</A>, -<A HREF="pi3topbm.html">pi3topbm</A>, -<A HREF="pbmtopi3.html">pbmtopi3</A> - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a>, +<a href="pi1toppm.html">pi1toppm</a>, +<a href="pi3topbm.html">pi3topbm</a>, +<a href="pbmtopi3.html">pbmtopi3</a> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pcxtoppm.html b/pcxtoppm.html index de6e4474..f868451b 100644 --- a/pcxtoppm.html +++ b/pcxtoppm.html @@ -1,26 +1,23 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pcxtoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pcxtoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Pcxtoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pcxtoppm</h1> Updated: 19 April 2004 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pcxtoppm - convert a PCX file into a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pcxtoppm</B> -[<B>-stdpalette</B>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] -[<I>pcxfile</I>] +<b>pcxtoppm</b> +[<b>-stdpalette</b>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] +[<i>pcxfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -29,36 +26,40 @@ as output. <p><b>pcxtoppm</b> recognizes the following PCX types: -<UL COMPACT> -<LI>Colormapped files with 2-16 colors. +<ul compact> +<li>Colormapped files with 2-16 colors. -<P>"Packed pixel" format (1, 2 or 4 bits/pixel, 1 plane) or +<p>"Packed pixel" format (1, 2 or 4 bits/pixel, 1 plane) or bitplane format (1 bit/pixel, 1-4 planes). The program uses a predefined standard palette if the image does not provide one. "Does not provide one" means the palette in the PCX header is completely black. -<LI>Colormapped files with 256 colors. +<li>Colormapped files with 256 colors. -<P>8 bits/pixel, 1 plane, colormap at the end of the file. +<p>8 bits/pixel, 1 plane, colormap at the end of the file. -<LI>24bit truecolor files. +<li>24bit truecolor files. -<P>24bit RGB: 8 bits/pixel, 3 planes. +<p>24bit RGB: 8 bits/pixel, 3 planes. -<LI>32bit truecolor files. +<li>32bit truecolor files. -<P>24bit RGB + 8bit intensity: 8 bits/pixel, 4 planes. +<p>24bit RGB + 8bit intensity: 8 bits/pixel, 4 planes. -</UL> +</ul> -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-stdpalette</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pcxtoppm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>This option causes <b>pcxtoppm</b> to use its predefined standard +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-stdpalette</b> + +<dd>This option causes <b>pcxtoppm</b> to use its predefined standard palette even if the PCX image provides its own. This is meaningful only for an image in the 16 color paletted PCX format. @@ -66,32 +67,32 @@ for an image in the 16 color paletted PCX format. by a program too primitive to understand palettes that created a random palette by accident. -</DL> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> + +<dd>Report details of the PCX header. + +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmtopcx.html">ppmtopcx</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppmtopcx.html">ppmtopcx</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHORS</H2> +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> <p>Copyright 1990 by Michael Davidson. -<p>Modified 1994 by Ingo Wilken (<A -HREF="mailto:Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de">Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de</A>) - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p>Modified 1994 by Ingo Wilken (<a +href="mailto:Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de">Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de</a>) + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pgmabel.html b/pgmabel.html index cb53ea52..c1e341fb 100644 --- a/pgmabel.html +++ b/pgmabel.html @@ -1,19 +1,15 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML> -<HEAD><title>Pgmabel User Manual</title></HEAD> - -<BODY> -<H1>pgmabel</H1> +<html><head><title>Pgmabel User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pgmabel</h1> Updated: June 2002 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pgmabel - create cross section using Abel Integration for Deconvolution -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <b>pgmabel</b> [<b>-help</b>] @@ -22,10 +18,9 @@ pgmabel - create cross section using Abel Integration for Deconvolution [<b>-pixsize</b> <i>pixsize</i>] [<b>-left</b> | <b>-right</b>] [<b>-verbose</b>] -[<I>filespec</I>] +[<i>filespec</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -44,17 +39,21 @@ by the surface area of the calculated ring in square pixels divided by With the <b>-verbose</b> option, <b>pgmabel</b> prints the weighting factors. -<P>Where the calculation generates a negative result, the output is black. +<p>Where the calculation generates a negative result, the output is black. -<P>The computation is unstable against periodic structures with size 2 in +<p>The computation is unstable against periodic structures with size 2 in the vertical direction. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pgmabel</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<P>You can abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. +<p>You can abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. -<DL COMPACT> +<dl compact> <dt><b>-help</b> <dd>Prints a help message. @@ -80,10 +79,9 @@ Analogous to <b>-left</b>. <dt><b>-verbose</b> <dd>print information about the calculation. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="example"> </A> -<h2>EXAMPLE</h2> +<h2 id="example">EXAMPLE</h2> <p>Rotate a PGM image to get an image with a vertical axis of symmetry, then calculate the cross section: @@ -94,36 +92,31 @@ then calculate the cross section: -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmrotate.html">pnmrotate</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pnmrotate.html">pnmrotate</a></b>, +<b><a href="pgm.html">pgm</a></b>, -<A NAME="history"> </A> -<H2>HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p>This program was added to Netpbm in Release 10.3 (June 2002). -<A NAME="author"></a> -<h2>AUTHOR</h2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Volker Schmidt (lefti@voyager.boerde.de) <p>Copyright (C) 1997-2002 German Aerospace research establishment -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#example">EXAMPLE</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#example">EXAMPLE</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pgmtolispm.html b/pgmtolispm.html index 2cec5109..c54137cf 100644 --- a/pgmtolispm.html +++ b/pgmtolispm.html @@ -1,73 +1,73 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pgmtolispm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pgmtolispm</H1> +<html><head><title>Pgmtolispm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pgmtolispm</h1> Updated: 06 March 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pgmtolispm - convert a PGM image to Lisp Machine format -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pgmtolispm</B> +<b>pgmtolispm</b> -[<I>pgmfile</I>] +[<i>pgmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pgmtolispm</b> reads a PGM image as input and produces a Lisp Machine bitmap as output. -<P>This is the file format read by the tv:read-bit-array-file function +<p>This is the file format read by the tv:read-bit-array-file function on TI Explorer and Symbolics lisp machines. -<P>Given a PGM (instead of a PBM), <b>pgmtolispm</b> outputs a +<p>Given a PGM (instead of a PBM), <b>pgmtolispm</b> outputs a multi-plane image. This is probably not useful unless you have a color lisp machine. -<P>Multi-plane bitmaps on lisp machines are color; but the lispm image +<p>Multi-plane bitmaps on lisp machines are color; but the lispm image file format does not include a color map, so we must treat it as a graymap instead. This is unfortunate. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="lispmtopgm.html">lispmtopgm</A>, -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pgmtolispm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="lispmtopgm.html">lispmtopgm</a>, +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> + +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> <p>Output width is always rounded up to the nearest multiple of 32; this might not always be what you want, but it probably is (arrays which are not modulo 32 cannot be passed to the Lispm BITBLT function, and thus cannot easily be displayed on the screen). -<P>No color. +<p>No color. -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Jamie Zawinski and Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pi1toppm.html b/pi1toppm.html index 097bf696..5a869b3e 100644 --- a/pi1toppm.html +++ b/pi1toppm.html @@ -1,55 +1,56 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pi1toppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pi1toppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Pi1toppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pi1toppm</h1> Updated: 19 July 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pi1toppm - convert an Atari Degas .pi1 into a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pi1toppm</B> +<b>pi1toppm</b> -[<I>pi1file</I>] +[<i>pi1file</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pi1toppm</b> reads an Atari Degas .pi1 file as input and produces a PPM image as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="ppmtopi1.html">ppmtopi1</A>, -<A HREF="pc1toppm.html">pc1toppm</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A>, -<A HREF="pi3topbm.html">pi3topbm</A>, -<A HREF="pbmtopi3.html">pbmtopi3</A> - -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> - -Copyright (C) 1991 by Steve Belczyk (<A -HREF="mailto:seb3@gte.com">seb3@gte.com</A>) and Jef Poskanzer. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pi1toppm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="ppmtopi1.html">ppmtopi1</a>, +<a href="pc1toppm.html">pc1toppm</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a>, +<a href="pi3topbm.html">pi3topbm</a>, +<a href="pbmtopi3.html">pbmtopi3</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Copyright (C) 1991 by Steve Belczyk (<a +href="mailto:seb3@gte.com">seb3@gte.com</a>) and Jef Poskanzer. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pi3topbm.html b/pi3topbm.html index 514bd05b..c9506702 100644 --- a/pi3topbm.html +++ b/pi3topbm.html @@ -1,53 +1,54 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pi3topbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pi3topbm</H1> +<html><head><title>Pi3topbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pi3topbm</h1> Updated: 11 March 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pi3topbm - convert an Atari Degas .pi3 file into a PBM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pi3topbm</B> +<b>pi3topbm</b> -[<I>pi3file</I>] +[<i>pi3file</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pi3topbm</b> reads an Atari Degas .pi3 file as input and produces a PBM image as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pbmtopi3.html">pbmtopi3</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A>, -<A HREF="pi1toppm.html">pi1toppm</A>, -<A HREF="ppmtopi1.html">ppmtopi1</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pi3topbm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pbmtopi3.html">pbmtopi3</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a>, +<a href="pi1toppm.html">pi1toppm</a>, +<a href="ppmtopi1.html">ppmtopi1</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1988 by David Beckemeyer (bdt!david) and Diomidis D. Spinellis. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pjtoppm.html b/pjtoppm.html index 4610281e..26f28bae 100644 --- a/pjtoppm.html +++ b/pjtoppm.html @@ -1,25 +1,22 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pjtoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pjtoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Pjtoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pjtoppm</h1> Updated: 14 July 1991 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pjtoppm - convert an HP PaintJet file to a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pjtoppm</B> +<b>pjtoppm</b> -[<I>paintjet</I>] +[<i>paintjet</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -29,31 +26,34 @@ only handles a small subset of the paintjet commands. In particular, it will only handle enough commands to convert most raster image files. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>REFERENCES</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pjtoppm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="references">REFERENCES</h2> HP PaintJet XL Color Graphics Printer User's Guide -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="ppmtopj.html">ppmtopj</A> +<a href="ppmtopj.html">ppmtopj</a> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Christos Zoulas. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">REFERENCES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#references">REFERENCES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pktopbm.html b/pktopbm.html index b7be08f2..eb955add 100644 --- a/pktopbm.html +++ b/pktopbm.html @@ -1,23 +1,20 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pktopbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pktopbm</H1> +<html><head><title>Pktopbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pktopbm</h1> Updated: 6 August 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pktopbm - convert packed (PK) format font into PBM -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> pktopbm pkfile[.pk] [ -x width ] [ -y height ] [-c num] pbmfile ... -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -31,49 +28,49 @@ and voffset given in the pkfile. The basepoint will be placed in the lower left corner of the bitmap if the bitmap is bigger than the specified size it will be truncated at the top or right. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><b>-c</b> <i>num</i> -<DD> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pktopbm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: + +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-c</b> <i>num</i> +<dd> Sets the character number of the next bitmap written to <i>num</i>. -<DT><b>-x</b> <i>width</i> -<DD> +<dt><b>-x</b> <i>width</i> +<dd> Sets the width of the image in columns. -<DT><b>-y</b> <i>width</i> -<DD> +<dt><b>-y</b> <i>width</i> +<dd> Sets the height of the image in rows. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="pbmtopk.html">pbmtopk</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> +<a href="pbmtopk.html">pbmtopk</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Adapted from Tom Rokicki's pxtopk by Angus Duggan <<A -HREF="mailto:ajcd@dcs.ed.ac.uk">ajcd@dcs.ed.ac.uk</A>>. <<A -HREF="mailto:bartel@informatik.tu-muenchen.de">bartel@informatik.tu-muenchen.de</A>> +Adapted from Tom Rokicki's pxtopk by Angus Duggan <<a +href="mailto:ajcd@dcs.ed.ac.uk">ajcd@dcs.ed.ac.uk</a>>. <<a +href="mailto:bartel@informatik.tu-muenchen.de">bartel@informatik.tu-muenchen.de</a>> in March 1995. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnminvert.html b/pnminvert.html index ff858dfc..05d3271d 100644 --- a/pnminvert.html +++ b/pnminvert.html @@ -1,25 +1,22 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnminvert User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnminvert</H1> +<html><head><title>Pnminvert User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnminvert</h1> Updated: 08 August 1989 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnminvert - invert a PNM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnminvert</B> +<b>pnminvert</b> -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -33,25 +30,29 @@ gray value G, the output pixel has gray value maxval - G. <p>If the image is color, <b>pnminvert</b> inverts each individual RGB component the same as for a grayscale image. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pnminvert</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmtoddif.html b/pnmtoddif.html index 987cabf2..2fc2a8e1 100644 --- a/pnmtoddif.html +++ b/pnmtoddif.html @@ -1,37 +1,34 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmtoddif User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmtoddif</H1> +<html><head><title>Pnmtoddif User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmtoddif</h1> Updated: 2003 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmtoddif - Convert a PNM image to DDIF format -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmtoddif</B> +<b>pnmtoddif</b> [<b>-resolution</b> <i>x</i> <i>y</i>] [<i>pnmfile</i> [<i>ddiffile</i>]] -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pnmtoddif</b> takes a PNM image and converts it into a DDIF image file. -<P><b>pnmtoddif</b> writes PBM format (bitmap) data as a 1 bit DDIF, +<p><b>pnmtoddif</b> writes PBM format (bitmap) data as a 1 bit DDIF, PGM format data (grayscale) as an 8 bit grayscale DDIF, and PPM format (color) data as an 8,8,8 bit color DDIF. <b>pnmtoddif</b> writes any DDIF image file uncompressed. The data plane organization is interleaved by pixel. -<P>In addition to the number of pixels in the width and height +<p>In addition to the number of pixels in the width and height dimension, DDIF images also carry information about the size that the image should have, that is, the physical space that a pixel occupies. Netpbm images do not carry this information, hence you have to supply @@ -39,49 +36,54 @@ it externally. The default of 78 dpi has the beneficial property of not causing a resize on most Digital Equipment Corporation color monitors. -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>resolution</b> <i>x</i> <i>y</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmtoddif</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DD>The horizontal and vertical resolution of the output image in dots +<dl compact> +<dt><b>resolution</b> <i>x</i> <i>y</i> + +<dd>The horizontal and vertical resolution of the output image in dots per inch. Default is 78 dpi. -</DL> +</dl> -<a name="arguments"></a> -<h2>ARGUMENTS</h2> +<h2 id="arguments">ARGUMENTS</h2> <dl> -<DT><I>pnmfile</I> +<dt><i>pnmfile</i> -<DD>The filename for the image file in pnm format. Default is to +<dd>The filename for the image file in pnm format. Default is to read from Standard Input. -<DT><I>ddiffile</I> +<dt><i>ddiffile</i> -<DD>The filename for the image file to be created in DDIF format. By +<dd>The filename for the image file to be created in DDIF format. By default, <b>pnmtoddif</b> writes to Standard Output. -</DL> +</dl> + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Burkhard Neidecker-Lutz, Digital Equipment Corporation, CEC Karlsruhe -<A HREF="mailto:neideck@nestvx.enet.dec.com">neideck@nestvx.enet.dec.com</A> - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#arguments">ARGUMENTS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<a href="mailto:neideck@nestvx.enet.dec.com">neideck@nestvx.enet.dec.com</a> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#arguments">ARGUMENTS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmtojbig.html b/pnmtojbig.html index 01200628..30c4c36d 100644 --- a/pnmtojbig.html +++ b/pnmtojbig.html @@ -1,37 +1,34 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmtojbig User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>PNMTOJBIG</H1> +<html><head><title>Pnmtojbig User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>PNMTOJBIG</h1> Updated: 20 May 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmtojbig - PNM to JBIG file converter -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmtojbig</B> +<b>pnmtojbig</b> -[<I>options</I>] -[<I>input-file</I> [<I>output-file</I>]] +[<i>options</i>] +[<i>input-file</i> [<i>output-file</i>]] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pnmtojbig</b> reads a PBM or PGM image, compresses it, and outputs the image as a JBIG bi-level image entity (BIE) file. -<P>JBIG is a highly effective lossless compression algorithm for +<p>JBIG is a highly effective lossless compression algorithm for bi-level images (one bit per pixel), which is particularly suitable for scanned document pages. -<P>A JBIG encoded image can be stored in several resolutions +<p>A JBIG encoded image can be stored in several resolutions (progressive mode). These resolution layers can be stored all in one single BIE or they can be stored in several separate BIE files. All resolution layers except the lowest one are stored merely as @@ -39,74 +36,78 @@ differences to the next lower resolution layer, because this requires less space than encoding the full image completely every time. Each resolution layer has twice the number of horizontal and vertical pixels than the next lower layer. JBIG files can also store several -bits per pixel as separate bitmap planes, and <B>pnmtojbig</B> +bits per pixel as separate bitmap planes, and <b>pnmtojbig</b> can read a PGM file and transform it into a multi-bitplane BIE. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmtojbig</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DT><B>-q</B> +<dl compact> -<DD>Encode the image in one single resolution layer (sequential +<dt><b>-q</b> + +<dd>Encode the image in one single resolution layer (sequential mode). This is usually the most efficient compression method. By default, the number of resolution layers is chosen automatically such that the lowest layer image is not larger than 640 × 480 pixels. -<DT><B>-x</B> <I>number</I> +<dt><b>-x</b> <i>number</i> -<DD>Specify the maximal horizontal size of the lowest resolution +<dd>Specify the maximal horizontal size of the lowest resolution layer. The default is 640 pixels. -<DT><B>-y</B> <I>number</I> +<dt><b>-y</b> <i>number</i> -<DD>Specify the maximal vertical size of the lowest resolution layer. +<dd>Specify the maximal vertical size of the lowest resolution layer. The default is 480 pixels. -<DT><B>-l</B> <I>number</I> +<dt><b>-l</b> <i>number</i> -<DD>Select the lowest resolution layer that will be written to the +<dd>Select the lowest resolution layer that will be written to the BIE. It is possible to store the various resolution layers of a JBIG -image in progressive mode into different BIEs. Options <B>-l</B> and -<B>-h</B> allow you to select the resolution-layer interval that will +image in progressive mode into different BIEs. Options <b>-l</b> and +<b>-h</b> allow you to select the resolution-layer interval that will appear in the created BIE. The lowest resolution layer has number 0 and this is also the default value. By default, <b>pnmtojbig</b> writes all layers. -<DT><B>-h</B> <I>number</I> +<dt><b>-h</b> <i>number</i> -<DD>Select the highest resolution layer that will be written to the +<dd>Select the highest resolution layer that will be written to the BIE. By default, <b>pnmtojbig</b> writes all layers. See also option -<B>-l</B>. +<b>-l</b>. -<DT><B>-b</B> +<dt><b>-b</b> -<DD>Use binary values instead of Gray code words in order to encode +<dd>Use binary values instead of Gray code words in order to encode pixel values in multiple bitplanes. This option has only an effect if the input is a PGM file and if more than one bitplane is produced. Note that the decoder has to make the same selection but cannot determine from the BIE, whether Gray or binary code words were used by the encoder. -<DT><B>-d</B> <I>number</I> +<dt><b>-d</b> <i>number</i> -<DD>Specify the total number of differential resolution layers into +<dd>Specify the total number of differential resolution layers into which the input image will be split in addition to the lowest layer. Each additional layer reduces the size of layer 0 by 50 %. This -option overrides options <B>-x</B> and <B>-y</B>, which are usually a +option overrides options <b>-x</b> and <b>-y</b>, which are usually a more comfortable way of selecting the number of resolution layers. -<DT><B>-s</B> <I>number</I> +<dt><b>-s</b> <i>number</i> -<DD>The JBIG algorithm splits each image into a number of horizontal +<dd>The JBIG algorithm splits each image into a number of horizontal stripes. This option specifies that each stripe shall have -<I>number</I> lines in layer 0. The default value is selected so that +<i>number</i> lines in layer 0. The default value is selected so that approximately 35 stripes will be used for the whole image. -<DT><B>-m</B> <I>number</I> +<dt><b>-m</b> <i>number</i> -<DD>Select the maximum horizontal offset of the adaptive template +<dd>Select the maximum horizontal offset of the adaptive template pixel. The JBIG encoder uses a number of neighbour pixels in order to get statistical a priori knowledge of the probability, whether the next pixel will be black or white. One single pixel out of this @@ -117,31 +118,31 @@ of a dither function. By default, the adaptive template pixel can be moved up to 8 pixels away. This encoder supports up to 23 pixels, however as decoders are only required to support at least a distance of 16 pixels by the standard, no higher value than 16 for -<I>number</I> is recommended in order to maintain interoperability +<i>number</i> is recommended in order to maintain interoperability with other JBIG implementations. The maximal vertical offset of the adaptive template pixel is always zero. -<DT><B>-t</B> <I>number</I> +<dt><b>-t</b> <i>number</i> -<DD>Encode only the specified number of most significant bit planes. +<dd>Encode only the specified number of most significant bit planes. This option allows to reduce the depth of an input PGM file if not all bits per pixel are needed in the output. -<DT><B>-o</B> <I>number</I> +<dt><b>-o</b> <i>number</i> -<DD>JBIG separates an image into several horizontal stripes, +<dd>JBIG separates an image into several horizontal stripes, resolution layers and planes, were each plane contains one bit per pixel. One single stripe in one plane and layer is encoded as a data unit called stripe data entity (SDE) inside the BIE. There are 12 different possible orders in which the SDEs can be stored inside the -BIE and <I>number</I> selects which one shall be used. The order of +BIE and <i>number</i> selects which one shall be used. The order of the SDEs is only relevant for applications that want to decode a JBIG file which has not yet completely arrived from e.g. a slow network connection. For instance some applications prefer that the outermost of the three loops (stripes, layers, planes) is over all layers so that all data of the lowest resolution layer is transmitted first. -<p>The following values for <I>number</I> select these loop +<p>The following values for <i>number</i> select these loop arrangements for writing the SDEs (outermost loop first): <dl> @@ -165,19 +166,19 @@ arrangements for writing the SDEs (outermost loop first): </dl> -<P>All loops count starting with zero, however by adding 8 to the +<p>All loops count starting with zero, however by adding 8 to the above order code, the layer loop can be reversed so that it counts down to zero and then higher resolution layers will be stored before lower layers. Default order is 3 which writes at first all planes of the first stripe and then completes layer 0 before continuing with the next layer and so on. -<DT><B>-p</B> <I>number</I> +<dt><b>-p</b> <i>number</i> -<DD>This option allows you to activate or deactivate various optional +<dd>This option allows you to activate or deactivate various optional algorithms defined in the JBIG standard. Just add the numbers of the following options which you want to activate in order to get the -<I>number</I> value: +<i>number</i> value: <dl> @@ -195,14 +196,14 @@ following options which you want to activate in order to get the </dl> -<P>Except for special applications (like communication with JBIG +<p>Except for special applications (like communication with JBIG subset implementations) and for debugging purposes you will normally not want to change anything here. The default is 28, which provides the best compression result. -<DT><B>-c</B> +<dt><b>-c</b> -<DD>The adaptive template pixel movement is determined as suggested in +<dd>The adaptive template pixel movement is determined as suggested in annex C of the standard. By default the template change takes place directly in the next line which is most effective. However a few conformance test examples in the standard require the adaptive @@ -210,76 +211,69 @@ template change to be delayed until the first line of the next stripe. This option selects this special behavior, which is normally not required except in order to pass some conformance test suite. -<DT><B>-v</B> +<dt><b>-v</b> -<DD>After <b>pnmtojbig</b> creates the BIE, it lists a few technical +<dd>After <b>pnmtojbig</b> creates the BIE, it lists a few technical details of the created file (verbose mode). -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>FORMATS</H2> +<h2 id="formats">FORMATS</h2> -<P>Most of the format <B>pnmtojbig</B> creates is defined by the +<p>Most of the format <b>pnmtojbig</b> creates is defined by the JBIG standard. -<P>The standard, however, does not specify which values in the BIE mean +<p>The standard, however, does not specify which values in the BIE mean white and which mean black. It contains a recommendation that for a single plane image zero mean background and one mean foreground, but the Netpbm formats have no concept of foreground and background. And the standard says nothing about values for multiple plane BIEs. -<P><B>pnmtojbig</B> follows Markus Kuhn's implementation of the -standard in the <B>pbmtojbg</B> program that comes with his +<p><b>pnmtojbig</b> follows Markus Kuhn's implementation of the +standard in the <b>pbmtojbg</b> program that comes with his JBIG library: If the BIE is a single plane BIE, zero means white and one means black. If it is a multiple plane BIE, zero means black and the maximal value is white. -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>STANDARDS</H2> +<h2 id="standards">STANDARDS</h2> <p>This program implements the JBIG image coding algorithm as specified in ISO/IEC 11544:1993 and ITU-T T.82(1993). -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<B>pnmtojbig</B> is based on the JBIG library by Markus Kuhn, part of -his <B>JBIG-KIT</B> package. The <B>pbmtojbg</B> program is part of -the <I>JBIG-KIT</I> package. The most recent version of that library +<b>pnmtojbig</b> is based on the JBIG library by Markus Kuhn, part of +his <b>JBIG-KIT</b> package. The <b>pbmtojbg</b> program is part of +the <i>JBIG-KIT</i> package. The most recent version of that library and tools set is freely available on the Internet from anonymous ftp -server <A -HREF="ftp://ftp.informatik.uni-erlangen.de">ftp.informatik.uni-erlangen.de</A> +server <a +href="ftp://ftp.informatik.uni-erlangen.de">ftp.informatik.uni-erlangen.de</a> in directory pub/doc/ISO/JBIG/. -<P><B>pnmtojbig</B> is part of the Netpbm package of graphics tools. +<p><b>pnmtojbig</b> is part of the Netpbm package of graphics tools. -<A NAME="lbAI"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="jbigtopnm.html">jbigtopnm</A></B> +<b><a href="pnm.html">pnm</a></b>, +<b><a href="jbigtopnm.html">jbigtopnm</a></b> -<A NAME="lbAJ"> </A> -<H2>LICENSE</H2> +<h2 id="license">LICENSE</h2> -If you use <B>pnmtojbig</B>, you are using various patents, +If you use <b>pnmtojbig</b>, you are using various patents, particularly on its arithmetic encoding method, and in all probability you do not have a license from the patent owners to do so. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">FORMATS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">STANDARDS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">AUTHOR</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAI">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAJ">LICENSE</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#formats">FORMATS</a> +<li><a href="#standards">STANDARDS</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#license">LICENSE</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmtopnm.html b/pnmtopnm.html index 2fd4aa3b..f0384083 100644 --- a/pnmtopnm.html +++ b/pnmtopnm.html @@ -1,28 +1,25 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmtopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmtopnm</H1> +<html><head><title>Pnmtopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmtopnm</h1> Updated: 24 March 2005 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmtopnm - copy a PNM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmtopnm</B> +<b>pnmtopnm</b> -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pnmtopnm</b> simply copies a PNM image to Standard Output. The +<p><b>pnmtopnm</b> simply copies a PNM image to Standard Output. The output has the same major PNM format (PBM, PGM, or PPM) and maxval as the input. This may seem an unnecessary duplication of <b>cat</b>, but it lets you convert between the plain (ASCII) and raw (binary) @@ -43,8 +40,14 @@ programs that process PNM images. program that takes PAM input via the Netpbm programming library facilities, it also takes PNM input. -<A NAME="history"> </A> -<H2>HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pnmtopnm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p><b>pnmtopnm</b> was new in Netpbm 10.23 (July 2004). It obsoleted <b>pnmtoplainpnm</b>, which specifically did the conversion to plain @@ -57,22 +60,21 @@ did everything that <b>pnmtopnm</b> did and more, so in Netpbm 10.27 (March 2005), <b>pnmtopnm</b> became simply an alternate name for <b>pamtopnm</b>. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="ppmtoppm.html">ppmtoppm</A> -<A HREF="pgmtopgm.html">pgmtopgm</A> -<A HREF="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</A> -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="ppmtoppm.html">ppmtoppm</a> +<a href="pgmtopgm.html">pgmtopgm</a> +<a href="pamtopnm.html">pamtopnm</a> +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmtorle.html b/pnmtorle.html index c62147a8..82573cce 100644 --- a/pnmtorle.html +++ b/pnmtorle.html @@ -1,28 +1,25 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmtorle User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>PNMTORLE</H1> +<html><head><title>Pnmtorle User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>PNMTORLE</h1> Updated: March 31, 1994 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmtorle - convert a Netpbm image file into an RLE image file. -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmtorle</B> +<b>pnmtorle</b> -[<B>-h</B>] -[<B>-v</B>] -[<B>-a</B>] -[<B>-o</B> <I>outfile</I>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<b>-h</b>] +[<b>-v</b>] +[<b>-a</b>] +[<b>-o</b> <i>outfile</i>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -30,7 +27,7 @@ pnmtorle - convert a Netpbm image file into an RLE image file. You can include a transparency mask. If the input is a multiple image file, the output consists of several concatenated RLE images. -<P>The RLE file will contain either a three channel color image (24 +<p>The RLE file will contain either a three channel color image (24 bits) or a single channel grayscale image (8 bits) depending upon the pnm file depth. If a converted ppm is displayed on an 8 bit display, the image must be dithered. In order to produce a better looking @@ -39,45 +36,48 @@ quantizing (to 8 bit mapped color) prior to its display. This may be done by piping the output of this program into the Utah <b>mcut</b> or <b>rlequant</b> utilities. We show an example of this later. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-v</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmtorle</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-v</b> + +<dd> This option will cause <b>pnmtorle</b> to operate in verbose mode. The header information is written to "stderr". Actually, there is not much header information stored in a Netpbm file, so this information is minimal. -<DT><B>-h</B> +<dt><b>-h</b> -<DD> +<dd> This option allows the header of the Netpbm image to be dumped to "stderr" without converting the file. It is equivalent to using the -v option except that no file conversion takes place. -<DT><B>-a</B> +<dt><b>-a</b> -<DD> +<dd> This option causes <b>pnmtorle</b> to include an transparency channel in the output image. The transparency channel is based on the image: Wherever a pixel is black, the corresponding trasparency value is transparent. Everywhere else, the transparency value is fully opaque. -<DT><B>-o</B> <I>outfile</I> +<dt><b>-o</b> <i>outfile</i> -<DD>If you specify this option, <b>pnmtorle</b> writes the output to -this file. If <I>outfile</I> is <b>-</b> or you don't specify +<dd>If you specify this option, <b>pnmtorle</b> writes the output to +this file. If <i>outfile</i> is <b>-</b> or you don't specify <b>-o</b>, <b>pnmtorle</b> writes the output to Standard Output. -<DT><I>pnmfile</I> +<dt><i>pnmfile</i> -<DD> +<dd> The name of the Netpbm image data file to be converted. If not specified, standard input is assumed. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> <pre> pnmtorle -v file.ppm -o file.rle @@ -92,13 +92,11 @@ resulting data in file.rle. <p>Dump the header information of the Netpbm file called file.pgm. -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="rletopnm.html">rletopnm</A></B> +<b><a href="rletopnm.html">rletopnm</a></b> -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <pre> Wes Barris, @@ -106,17 +104,15 @@ Army High Performance Computing Research Center (AHPCRC) Minnesota Supercomputer Center, Inc. </pre> -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmtosgi.html b/pnmtosgi.html index 62cda3e8..71dc59ee 100644 --- a/pnmtosgi.html +++ b/pnmtosgi.html @@ -1,87 +1,83 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmtosgi User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmtosgi</H1> +<html><head><title>Pnmtosgi User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmtosgi</h1> Updated: 29 January 1994 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmtosgi - convert a PNM image to a SGI image file -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmtosgi</B> +<b>pnmtosgi</b> -[<B>-verbatim</B>|<B>-rle</B>] +[<b>-verbatim</b>|<b>-rle</b>] -[<B>-imagename</B> <I>Name</I>] +[<b>-imagename</b> <i>Name</i>] -[<B>pnmfile</B>] +[<b>pnmfile</b>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>pnmtosgi</b> reads a PNM image as input and produces an SGI +<p><b>pnmtosgi</b> reads a PNM image as input and produces an SGI image file as output. The SGI image will be 2-dimensional (1 channel) for PBM and PGM input, and 3-dimensional (3 channels) for PPM. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-verbatim</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmtosgi</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-verbatim</b> + +<dd> Write an uncompressed file. -<DT><B>-rle</B> (default) +<dt><b>-rle</b> (default) -<DD> +<dd> Write a compressed (run length encoded) file. -<DT><B>-imagename</b> <i>name</i> +<dt><b>-imagename</b> <i>name</i> -<DD> +<dd> Write the string "name" into the imagename field of the header. The name string is limited to 79 characters. If no name is given, pnmtosgi writes "no name" into this field. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>REFERENCES</H2> +<h2 id="references">REFERENCES</h2> -SGI Image File Format documentation (draft v0.95) by Paul Haeberli (<A -HREF="mailto:paul@sgi.com">paul@sgi.com</A>). Available via ftp at +SGI Image File Format documentation (draft v0.95) by Paul Haeberli (<a +href="mailto:paul@sgi.com">paul@sgi.com</a>). Available via ftp at sgi.com:graphics/SGIIMAGESPEC. -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A>, -<A HREF="sgitopnm.html">sgitopnm</A> - -<A NAME="lbAI"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> - -Copyright (C) 1994 by Ingo Wilken (<A -HREF="mailto:Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de">Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de</A>) - - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">REFERENCES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAI">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a>, +<a href="sgitopnm.html">sgitopnm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Copyright (C) 1994 by Ingo Wilken (<a +href="mailto:Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de">Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de</a>) + + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#references">REFERENCES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmtosir.html b/pnmtosir.html index b16d96f6..944aff8f 100644 --- a/pnmtosir.html +++ b/pnmtosir.html @@ -1,55 +1,55 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmtosir User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmtosir</H1> +<html><head><title>Pnmtosir User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmtosir</h1> Updated: 20 March 1991 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmtosir - convert a PNM image into a Solitaire format -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmtosir</B> +<b>pnmtosir</b> -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pnmtosir</b> reads a PNM image as input and produces a Solitaire Image Recorder format image. -<P><b>pnmtosir</b> produces an MGI TYPE 17 file for PBM and PGM files. For +<p><b>pnmtosir</b> produces an MGI TYPE 17 file for PBM and PGM files. For PPM, it writes a MGI TYPE 11 file. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="sirtopnm.html">sirtopnm</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>pnmtosir</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="sirtopnm.html">sirtopnm</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Marvin Landis. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">BUGS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/pnmtoxwd.html b/pnmtoxwd.html index a8def604..939f2f90 100644 --- a/pnmtoxwd.html +++ b/pnmtoxwd.html @@ -1,68 +1,78 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Pnmtoxwd User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>pnmtoxwd</H1> +<html><head><title>Pnmtoxwd User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>pnmtoxwd</h1> Updated: 24 September 1991 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> pnmtoxwd - convert a PNM into an X11 window dump -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>pnmtoxwd</B> +<b>pnmtoxwd</b> -[<B>-pseudodepth</B> <I>n</I>] +[<b>-pseudodepth</b> <i>n</i>] -[<B>-directcolor</B>] +[<b>-directcolor</b>] -[<I>pnmfile</I>] +[<i>pnmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>pnmtoxwd</b> reads a PNM image as input and produces an X11 window dump as output. You can display this output with <b>xwud</b>. -<P>Normally, pnmtoxwd produces a StaticGray dump file for PBM and PGM +<p>Normally, pnmtoxwd produces a StaticGray dump file for PBM and PGM files. For PPM, it writes a PseudoColor dump file if there are up to -256 colors in the input, and a DirectColor dump file otherwise. You -can use the <B>-directcolor</B> option to force a DirectColor dump. -And you can use <B>-pseudodepth</B> to change the depth of PseudoColor -dumps from the default of 8 bits / 256 colors. +256 colors in the input, and a DirectColor dump file otherwise. <p>In an X11 window dump file, various integers can be represented in either big endian (most significant byte first) or little endian code. Those generated by <b>pnmtoxwd</b> are always big endian. +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>pnmtoxwd</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-directcolor</b> -<A HREF="xwdtopnm.html">xwdtopnm</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A>, +<dd> +<p>Output in DirectColor format. + +<dt><b>-pseudodepth</b> <i>1-16</i> + +<dd> +<p>Set the depth of PseudoColor dump in bits. Values between 1 to 16 are +accepted. Default is 8 (for a maximum of 256 colors.) + +</dl> + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="xwdtopnm.html">xwdtopnm</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a>, <b>xwud</b> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmcie.html b/ppmcie.html index d9951dc8..5c4e0445 100644 --- a/ppmcie.html +++ b/ppmcie.html @@ -1,55 +1,55 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmcie User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>PPMCIE</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmcie User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmcie</h1> Updated: July 31, 2005 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmcie - draw a CIE color chart as a PPM image -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmcie</B> +<b>ppmcie</b> [ -<B>-rec709</B>|<B>-cie</B>|<B>-ebu</B>|<B>-hdtv</B>|<B>-ntsc</B>|<B>-smpte</B> +<b>-rec709</b>|<b>-cie</b>|<b>-ebu</b>|<b>-hdtv</b>|<b>-ntsc</b>|<b>-smpte</b> ] -[<B>-xy</B>|<B>-upvp</B>] +[<b>-xy</b>|<b>-upvp</b>] -[<B>-red</B> <I>rx</I> <I>ry</I>] +[<b>-red</b> <i>rx</i> <i>ry</i>] -[<B>-green</B> <I>gx</I> <I>gy</I>] +[<b>-green</b> <i>gx</i> <i>gy</i>] -[<B>-blue</B> <I>bx</I> <I>by</I>] +[<b>-blue</b> <i>bx</i> <i>by</i>] -[<B>-white</B> <I>wx</I> <I>wy</I>] +[<b>-white</b> <i>wx</i> <i>wy</i>] -[<B>-size</B> <I>edge</I>] +[<b>-size</b> <i>edge</i>] -[{<B>-xsize</B>|<B>-width</B>} <I>width</I>] +[{<b>-xsize</b>|<b>-width</b>} <i>width</i>] -[{<B>-ysize</B>|<B>-height</B>} <I>height</I>] +[{<b>-ysize</b>|<b>-height</b>} <i>height</i>] -[<B>-noblack</B>] -[<B>-nowpoint</B>] -[<B>-nolabel</B>] -[<B>-noaxes</B>] -[<B>-full</B>] +[<b>-noblack</b>] +[<b>-nowpoint</b>] +[<b>-nolabel</b>] +[<b>-noaxes</b>] +[<b>-full</b>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<B>ppmcie</B> creates a PPM file containing a plot of the CIE +<b>ppmcie</b> creates a PPM file containing a plot of the CIE "tongue" color chart -- to the extent possible in a PPM image. Alternatively, creates a pseudo-PPM image of the color tongue using RGB values from a color system of your choice. -<P> +<p> The CIE color tongue is an image of all the hues that can be described by CIE X-Y chromaticity coordinates. They are arranged on a two dimensional coordinate plane with the X chromaticity on the horizontal @@ -57,40 +57,40 @@ axis and the Y chromaticity on the vertical scale. (You can choose alternatively to use CIE u'-v' chromaticity coordinates, but the general idea of the color tongue is the same). -<P> +<p> Note that the PPM format specifies that the RGB values in the file are from the ITU-R Recommendation BT.709 color system, gamma-corrected. -And positive. See <B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> for details. If -you use one of the color system options on <B>ppmcie</B>, what you get +And positive. See <b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> for details. If +you use one of the color system options on <b>ppmcie</b>, what you get is not a true PPM image, but is very similar. If you display such -<B>ppmcie</B> output using a device that expects PPM input (which +<b>ppmcie</b> output using a device that expects PPM input (which includes just about any computer graphics display program), it will display the wrong colors. -<P> +<p> However, you may have a device that expects one of these variations on PPM. -<P> +<p> In every RGB color system you can specify, including the default (which produces a true PPM image) there are hues in the color tongue that can't be represented. For example, monochromatic blue-green with a wavelength of 500nm cannot be represented in a PPM image. -<P> -For these hues, <B>ppmcie</B> substitutes a similar hue as follows: +<p> +For these hues, <b>ppmcie</b> substitutes a similar hue as follows: They are desaturated and rendered as the shade where the edge of the Maxwell triangle intersects a line drawn from the requested shade to the white point defined by the color system's white point. -Furthermore, unless you specify the <B>-full</B> option, <B>ppmcie</B> +Furthermore, unless you specify the <b>-full</b> option, <b>ppmcie</b> reduces their intensity by 25% compared to the true hues in the image. -<P> -<B>ppmcie</B> draws and labels the CIE X-Y coordinate axes unless you +<p> +<b>ppmcie</b> draws and labels the CIE X-Y coordinate axes unless you choose otherwise with options. -<P> -<B>ppmcie</B> draws the Maxwell triangle for the color system in use +<p> +<b>ppmcie</b> draws the Maxwell triangle for the color system in use on the color tongue. The Maxwell triangle is the triangle whose vertices are the primary illuminant hues for the color system. The hues inside the triangle show the color gamut for the color system. @@ -100,150 +100,155 @@ denotes the Maxwell triangle by rendering it at full brightness, while rendering the rest of the color tongue as 3/4 brightness. You can turn this off with options. -<P> -<B>ppmcie</B> also places a black cross at the color system's white +<p> +<b>ppmcie</b> also places a black cross at the color system's white point (with the center of the cross open so you can actually see the white color) and displays in text the CIE X-Y chromaticities of the primary illuminants and white point for the color system. You can turn this off with options, though. -<P> -<B>ppmcie</B> annotates the periphery of the color tongue with the +<p> +<b>ppmcie</b> annotates the periphery of the color tongue with the wavelength, in nanometers of the monochromatic hues which appear there. -<P> -<B>ppmcie</B> displays the black body chromaticity curve for Planckian +<p> +<b>ppmcie</b> displays the black body chromaticity curve for Planckian radiators from 1000 to 30000 kelvins on the image. This curve traces the colors of black bodies as various temperatures. -<P> +<p> You can choose from several standard color systems, or specify one of your own numerically. -<P> +<p> CIE charts, by their very nature, contain a very large number of colors. If you're encoding the chart for a color mapped device or -file format, you'll need to use <B>pnmquant</B> or <B>ppmdither</B> to +file format, you'll need to use <b>pnmquant</b> or <b>ppmdither</b> to reduce the number of colors in the image. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmcie</b> recognizes the following +command line options: <p>You may abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-rec709</B> -<DT><B>-cie</B> -<DT><B>-ebu</B> -<DT><B>-hdtv</B> -<DT><B>-ntsc</B> -<DT><B>-smpte</B> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-rec709</b> +<dt><b>-cie</b> +<dt><b>-ebu</b> +<dt><b>-hdtv</b> +<dt><b>-ntsc</b> +<dt><b>-smpte</b> -<DD> +<dd> Select a standard color system whose gamut to plot. The default is -<B>-rec709</B>, which chooses ITU-R Recommendation BT.709, +<b>-rec709</b>, which chooses ITU-R Recommendation BT.709, gamma-corrected. This is the only color system for which -<B>ppmcie</B>'s output is a true PPM image. See explanation above. -<B>-ebu</B> chooses the primaries used in the PAL and SECAM -broadcasting standards. <B>-ntsc</B> chooses the primaries specified +<b>ppmcie</b>'s output is a true PPM image. See explanation above. +<b>-ebu</b> chooses the primaries used in the PAL and SECAM +broadcasting standards. <b>-ntsc</b> chooses the primaries specified by the NTSC broadcasting system (few modern monitors actually cover -this range). <B>-smpte</B> selects the primaries recommended by the +this range). <b>-smpte</b> selects the primaries recommended by the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) in -standards RP-37 and RP-145, and <B>-hdtv</B> uses the much broader -<I>HDTV ideal</I> primaries. <B>-cie</B> chooses a color system that +standards RP-37 and RP-145, and <b>-hdtv</b> uses the much broader +<i>HDTV ideal</i> primaries. <b>-cie</b> chooses a color system that has the largest possible gamut within the spectrum of the chart. This -is the same color system as you get with the <B>-cie</B> option to -John Walker's <B>cietoppm</B> program. +is the same color system as you get with the <b>-cie</b> option to +John Walker's <b>cietoppm</b> program. -<DT><B>-xy</B> +<dt><b>-xy</b> -<DD> +<dd> plot CIE 1931 x y chromaticities. This is the default. -<DT><B>-upvp</B> +<dt><b>-upvp</b> -<DD> +<dd> plot u' v' 1976 chromaticities rather than CIE 1931 x y chromaticities. The advantage of u' v' coordinates is that equal intervals of distance on the u' v' plane correspond roughly to the eye's ability to discriminate colors. -<DT><B>-red</B><I> rx ry</I> +<dt><b>-red</b><i> rx ry</i> -<DD> -specifies the CIE <I>x</I> and <I>y</I> co-ordinates of the red +<dd> +specifies the CIE <i>x</i> and <i>y</i> co-ordinates of the red illuminant of a custom color system and selects the custom system. -<DT><B>-green</B><I> gx gy</I> +<dt><b>-green</b><i> gx gy</i> -<DD> -specifies the CIE <I>x</I> and <I>y</I> co-ordinates of the green +<dd> +specifies the CIE <i>x</i> and <i>y</i> co-ordinates of the green illuminant of the color system and selects the custom system. -<DT><B>-blue</B><I> bx by</I> +<dt><b>-blue</b><i> bx by</i> -<DD> -specifies the CIE <I>x</I> and <I>y</I> co-ordinates of the blue +<dd> +specifies the CIE <i>x</i> and <i>y</i> co-ordinates of the blue illuminant of the color system and selects the custom system. -<DT><B>-white</B><I> wx wy</I> +<dt><b>-white</b><i> wx wy</i> -<DD> -specifies the CIE <I>x</I> and <I>y</I> co-ordinates of the white +<dd> +specifies the CIE <i>x</i> and <i>y</i> co-ordinates of the white point of the color system and selects the custom system. -<DT><B>-size</B><I> edge</I> +<dt><b>-size</b><i> edge</i> -<DD> -Create an image of <I>edge</I> by <I>edge</I> pixels. The default is +<dd> +Create an image of <i>edge</i> by <i>edge</i> pixels. The default is 512x512. -<DT><B>-xsize|-width</B><I> width</I> +<dt><b>-xsize|-width</b><i> width</i> -<DD> -Sets the width of the generated image to <I>width</I> pixels. The +<dd> +Sets the width of the generated image to <i>width</i> pixels. The default width is 512 pixels. If the height and width of the image are not the same, the CIE diagram will be stretched in the longer dimension. -<DT><B>-ysize|-height</B><I> height</I> +<dt><b>-ysize|-height</b><i> height</i> -<DD> -Sets the height of the generated image to <I>height</I> pixels. The +<dd> +Sets the height of the generated image to <i>height</i> pixels. The default height is 512 pixels. If the height and width of the image are not the same, the CIE diagram will be stretched in the longer dimension. -<DT><B>-noblack</B> +<dt><b>-noblack</b> -<DD> +<dd> Don't plot the black body chromaticity curve. -<DT><B>-nowpoint</B> +<dt><b>-nowpoint</b> -<DD> +<dd> Don't plot the color system's white point. -<DT><B>-nolabel</B> +<dt><b>-nolabel</b> -<DD> +<dd> Omit the label. -<DT><B>-noaxes</B> +<dt><b>-noaxes</b> -<DD> +<dd> Don't plot axes. -<DT><B>-full</B> +<dt><b>-full</b> -<DD> +<dd> Plot the entire CIE tongue in full brightness; don't dim the part which is outside the gamut of the specified color system (i.e. outside the Maxwell triangle). -</DL> +</dl> -<h2 id="interpret">INTERPRETATION OF COLOR CHART</h2> +<h2 id="interpretation">INTERPRETATION OF COLOR CHART</h2> <p>A color spectrum is a linear combination of one or more monochromatic colors. @@ -349,38 +354,37 @@ involve infrared and ultraviolet light, so you can't see them. This line is called the "line of purples." -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmdither.html">ppmdither</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppmdither.html">ppmdither</a></b>, +<b><a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p> -Copyright (C) 1995 by John Walker (<A -HREF="mailto:kelvin@fourmilab.ch">kelvin@fourmilab.ch</A>) +Copyright (C) 1995 by John Walker (<a +href="mailto:kelvin@fourmilab.ch">kelvin@fourmilab.ch</a>) <p> -WWW home page: <A -HREF="http://www.fourmilab.ch/">http://www.fourmilab.ch/</A> +WWW home page: <a +href="http://www.fourmilab.ch/">http://www.fourmilab.ch/</a> -<P> +<p> Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, without any conditions or restrictions. This software is provided as is without express or implied warranty. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#interpretation">INTERPRETATION OF COLOR CHART</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#interpretation">INTERPRETATION OF COLOR CHART</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmdist.html b/ppmdist.html index 0cdcc0d3..794bdeab 100644 --- a/ppmdist.html +++ b/ppmdist.html @@ -1,27 +1,24 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmdist User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmdist</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmdist User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmdist</h1> Updated: 22 July 1992 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmdist - simplistic grayscale assignment for machine generated, color images -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmdist</B> +<b>ppmdist</b> -[<B>-intensity</B>|<B>-frequency</B>] +[<b>-intensity</b>|<b>-frequency</b>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -29,15 +26,15 @@ ppmdist - simplistic grayscale assignment for machine generated, color images grayscale assignment intended for use with grayscale or bitmap printers. -<P>Often conversion from ppm to pgm will yield an image with contrast +<p>Often conversion from ppm to pgm will yield an image with contrast too low for good printer output. The program maximizes contrast between the gray levels output. -<P>A ppm input of n colors is read, and a pgm of n gray levels is +<p>A ppm input of n colors is read, and a pgm of n gray levels is written. The gray levels take on the values 0..n-1, while maxval takes on n-1. -<P>The mapping from color to stepped grayscale can be performed in +<p>The mapping from color to stepped grayscale can be performed in order of input pixel intensity, or input pixel frequency (number of repetitions). @@ -45,44 +42,44 @@ repetitions). colors. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-frequency</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmdist</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Sort input colors by the number of times a color appears in the +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-frequency</b> + +<dd>Sort input colors by the number of times a color appears in the input, before mapping to evenly distributed graylevels of output. -<DT><B>-intensity</B> +<dt><b>-intensity</b> <dd>Sort input colors by their grayscale intensity, before mapping to evenly distributed graylevels of output. This is the default. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</A>, -<A HREF="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</a>, +<a href="ppmhist.html">ppmhist</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1993 by Dan Stromberg. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmflash.html b/ppmflash.html index 29e1de1e..952dc53b 100644 --- a/ppmflash.html +++ b/ppmflash.html @@ -1,24 +1,21 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmflash User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmflash</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmflash User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmflash</h1> Updated: 26 January 2003 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmflash - brighten a picture to approach white -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> ppmflash -<I>flashfactor</I> -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +<i>flashfactor</i> +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -45,28 +42,32 @@ If <i>flashfactor</i> is one, the output is all white. <p><b>pnmgamma</b> is another way people do a similar brightening, though it isn't really intended for that. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pambrighten.html">pambrighten</A> -<A HREF="pamfunc.html">pamfunc</A>, -<A HREF="pnmgamma.html">pnmgamma</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A>, +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>ppmflash</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pambrighten.html">pambrighten</a> +<a href="pamfunc.html">pamfunc</a>, +<a href="pnmgamma.html">pnmgamma</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a>, + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1993 by Frank Neumann -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmntsc.html b/ppmntsc.html index cee5198c..c492e519 100644 --- a/ppmntsc.html +++ b/ppmntsc.html @@ -1,30 +1,30 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmntsc User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmntsc</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmntsc User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmntsc</h1> Updated: April 19, 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmntsc - Make RGB colors legal for NTSC or PAL color systems. -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmntsc</B> +<b>ppmntsc</b> -[<B>--pal</B>] -[<B>--legalonly</B>] -[<B>--illegalonly</B>] -[<B>--correctedonly</B>] -[<B>--verbose</B>] -[<B>--debug</B>] -[<I>infile</I>] +[<b>--pal</b>] +[<b>--legalonly</b>] +[<b>--illegalonly</b>] +[<b>--correctedonly</b>] +[<b>--verbose</b>] +[<b>--debug</b>] +[<i>infile</i>] -<P>Minimum unique abbreviations of options are acceptable. +<p>Minimum unique abbreviations of options are acceptable. -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -38,76 +38,79 @@ to an NTSC (or PAL) video system for recording, the "illegal" colors will be clipped. This may result in an undesirable looking picture. -<P>This utility tests each pixel in an image to see if it falls +<p>This utility tests each pixel in an image to see if it falls within the legal NTSC (or PAL) range. If not, it raises or lowers the pixel's saturation in the output so that it does fall within legal limits. Pixels that are already OK just go unmodified into the output. -<P>Input is from the file named <I>input</I>. If <I>input</I> is -<B>-</B>, input is from Standard Input. If you don't specify -<I>input</I>, input is from Standard Input. +<p>Input is from the file named <i>input</i>. If <i>input</i> is +<b>-</b>, input is from Standard Input. If you don't specify +<i>input</i>, input is from Standard Input. -<P>Output is always to Standard Output. +<p>Output is always to Standard Output. -<P>This program handles multi-image PPM input, producing multi-image +<p>This program handles multi-image PPM input, producing multi-image PPM output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmntsc</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DT><B>--pal</B> -<DD> +<dl compact> + +<dt><b>--pal</b> +<dd> Use the PAL transform instead of the default NTSC. -<DT><B>--verbose</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>--verbose</b> +<dd> Print a grand total of the number of illegal pixels. -<DT><B>--debug</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>--debug</b> +<dd> Produce a humongous listing of illegal colors and their legal counterparts. NOTE: This option may produce a great deal of output. -<DT><B>--legalonly</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>--legalonly</b> +<dd> Output only pixels that are already legal. Output black in place of pixels that are not. -<DT><B>--illegalonly</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>--illegalonly</b> +<dd> Output only pixels that are illegal (and output them uncorrected). Output black in place of pixels that are already legal. -<DT><B>--correctedonly</B> -<DD> +<dt><b>--correctedonly</b> +<dd> Output only pixels that are corrected versions of illegal pixels. Output black in place of pixels that are already legal. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppmdim.html">ppmdim</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pambrighten.html">pambrighten</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="pamdepth.html">pamdepth</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmdim.html">ppmdim</a></b>, +<b><a href="pambrighten.html">pambrighten</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Wes Barris, Minnesota Supercomputer Center, Inc., Bryan Henderson -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtoacad.html b/ppmtoacad.html index 7e70dc84..e25873b9 100644 --- a/ppmtoacad.html +++ b/ppmtoacad.html @@ -1,60 +1,61 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtoacad User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtoacad</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtoacad User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtoacad</h1> Updated: 10 October 1991 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtoacad - convert PPM to Autocad database or slide -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtoacad</B> +<b>ppmtoacad</b> -[<B>-dxb</B>] +[<b>-dxb</b>] -[<B>-poly</B>] +[<b>-poly</b>] -[<B>-background</B> <I>color</I>] +[<b>-background</b> <i>color</i>] -[<B>-white</B>] +[<b>-white</b>] -[<B>-aspect</B> <I>ratio</I>] +[<b>-aspect</b> <i>ratio</i>] -[<B>-8</B>] +[<b>-8</b>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ppmtoacad</b> reads a PPM image as input and produces an Autocad® slide file or binary database import (.dxb) file as -output. If you don't specify <I>ppmfile</I>, +output. If you don't specify <i>ppmfile</i>, <b>ppmtoacad</b> takes the input from Standard Input. <p>(Typographical note: the name of Autocad is often rendered as AutoCAD. Netpbm documentation uses standard American typography, wherein that is not a valid form of capitalization). -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<P>You may abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtoacad</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-dxb</B> +<p>You may abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. -<DD><b>ppmtoacad</b> writes an Autocad binary database import (.dxb) +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-dxb</b> + +<dd><b>ppmtoacad</b> writes an Autocad binary database import (.dxb) file. You read this file with the DXBIN command and, once loaded, it becomes part of the Autocad geometrical database, so you can view and edit it like any other object. Each sequence of identical pixels @@ -62,11 +63,11 @@ becomes a separate object in the database; this can result in very large Autocad drawing files. However, if you want to trace over a bitmap, it lets you zoom and pan around the bitmap as you wish. -<DT><B>-poly</B> +<dt><b>-poly</b> -<DD>If you don't specify the <B>-dxb</B> option, <b>ppmtoacad</b> +<dd>If you don't specify the <b>-dxb</b> option, <b>ppmtoacad</b> generates an Autocad slide file. Normally each row of pixels is -represented by an Autocad line entity. If you specify <B>-poly</B>, +represented by an Autocad line entity. If you specify <b>-poly</b>, <b>ppmtoacad</b> renders the pixels as filled polygons. If you view the slide on a display with higher resolution than the source image, this will cause the pixels to expand instead of appearing as discrete @@ -74,100 +75,95 @@ lines against the screen background color. Regrettably, this representation yields slide files which occupy more storage space and take longer to display. -<DT><B>-background</B> <I>color</I> +<dt><b>-background</b> <i>color</i> -<DD>Most Autocad display drivers can be configured to use any +<dd>Most Autocad display drivers can be configured to use any available color as the screen background. Some users prefer a black screen background, others white, while splinter groups advocate burnt ocher, tawny puce, and shocking gray. Discarding pixels whose closest Autocad color representation is equal to the background color can substantially reduce the size of the Autocad database or slide file needed to represent a bitmap. If you don't specify -<B>-background</B>, <b>ppmtoacad</b> assumes the screen background +<b>-background</b>, <b>ppmtoacad</b> assumes the screen background color to be black. You may specify any Autocad color number as the screen background; <b>ppmtoacad</b> assumes color numbers to specify the hues defined in the standard Autocad 256 color palette. -<DT><B>-white</B> +<dt><b>-white</b> -<DD>Since many Autocad users choose a white screen background, this -option is provided as a short-cut. Specifying <B>-white</B> is -identical in effect to <B>-background 7</B>. +<dd>Since many Autocad users choose a white screen background, this +option is provided as a short-cut. Specifying <b>-white</b> is +identical in effect to <b>-background 7</b>. -<DT><B>-aspect</B> <I>ratio</I> +<dt><b>-aspect</b> <i>ratio</i> -<DD>If the source image had non-square pixels (which means it is not +<dd>If the source image had non-square pixels (which means it is not standard PPM), specify the ratio of the pixel width to pixel height as -<I>ratio</I>. <b>ppmtoacad</b> will correct the resulting slide or +<i>ratio</i>. <b>ppmtoacad</b> will correct the resulting slide or .dxb file so that pixels on the Autocad screen will be square. For example, to correct an image made for a 320x200 VGA/MCGA screen, -specify <B>-aspect 0.8333</B>. +specify <b>-aspect 0.8333</b>. -<DT><B>-8</B> +<dt><b>-8</b> -<DD>Restricts the colors in the output file to the 8 RGB shades. -</DL> +<dd>Restricts the colors in the output file to the 8 RGB shades. +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>RESTRICTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="restrictions">RESTRICTIONS</h2> -<P>Autocad has a fixed palette of 256 colors, distributed along the +<p>Autocad has a fixed palette of 256 colors, distributed along the hue, lightness, and saturation axes. So it may poorly render images which contain many nearly-identical colors, or colors not closely approximated by Autocad's palette. -<P><B>ppmtoacad</B> works best if the system displaying its output can +<p><b>ppmtoacad</b> works best if the system displaying its output can display the full 256 color Autocad palette. Monochrome, 8 color, and 16 color configurations will produce less than optimal results. -<P>When creating a .dxb file or a slide file with the <B>-poly</B> -option, <B>ppmtoacad</B> finds both vertical and horizontal runs of +<p>When creating a .dxb file or a slide file with the <b>-poly</b> +option, <b>ppmtoacad</b> finds both vertical and horizontal runs of identical pixels and consolidates them into rectangular regions to reduce the size of the output file. This is effective for images with large areas of constant color but it's no substitute for true raster to vector conversion. In particular, this process does not optimize thin diagonal lines at all. -<P>Output files can be huge. +<p>Output files can be huge. -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<p>Autocad Reference Manual: <I>Slide File Format</I> and <I>Binary -Drawing Interchange (DXB) Files</I>, <B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<p>Autocad Reference Manual: <i>Slide File Format</i> and <i>Binary +Drawing Interchange (DXB) Files</i>, <b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<PRE> +<pre> John Walker Autodesk SA Avenue des Champs-Montants 14b CH-2074 MARIN Suisse/Schweiz/Svizzera/Svizra/Switzerland - <B>Usenet:</B><A HREF="mailto:kelvin@Autodesk.com">kelvin@Autodesk.com</A> - <B>Fax:</B>038/33 88 15 - <B>Voice:</B>038/33 76 33 -</PRE> + <b>Usenet:</b><a href="mailto:kelvin@Autodesk.com">kelvin@Autodesk.com</a> + <b>Fax:</b>038/33 88 15 + <b>Voice:</b>038/33 76 33 +</pre> -<P>Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and +<p>Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, without any conditions or restrictions. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. -<P>Autocad and Autodesk are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p>Autocad and Autodesk are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#restrictions">RESTRICTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtoeyuv.html b/ppmtoeyuv.html index 4c3a5fe8..fa03cecf 100644 --- a/ppmtoeyuv.html +++ b/ppmtoeyuv.html @@ -1,25 +1,22 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtoeyuv User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtoeyuv</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtoeyuv User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtoeyuv</h1> Updated: April 3, 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtoeyuv - convert a PPM image into a Berkeley YUV file -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtoeyuv</B> +<b>ppmtoeyuv</b> -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -27,30 +24,35 @@ ppmtoeyuv - convert a PPM image into a Berkeley YUV file Encoder YUV (not the same as Abekas YUV) file on the Standard Output file. -<P>With no argument, <b>ppmtoeyuv</b>takes input from Standard Input. -Otherwise, <I>ppmfile</I> is the file specification of the input file. +<p>With no argument, <b>ppmtoeyuv</b>takes input from Standard Input. +Otherwise, <i>ppmfile</i> is the file specification of the input file. -<P><B>ppmtoeyuv</B> handles multi-image PPM input streams, outputting +<p><b>ppmtoeyuv</b> handles multi-image PPM input streams, outputting consecutive eyuv images. There must be at least one image, though. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<B><A HREF="eyuvtoppm.html">eyuvtoppm</A></B>, +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>ppmtoeyuv</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<B><A HREF="ppmtoyuv.html">ppmtoyuv</A></B>, +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="eyuvtoppm.html">eyuvtoppm</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppmtoyuv.html">ppmtoyuv</a></b>, -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> + + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtoicr.html b/ppmtoicr.html index 5a7f43ec..a44660e0 100644 --- a/ppmtoicr.html +++ b/ppmtoicr.html @@ -1,122 +1,126 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtoicr User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtoicr</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtoicr User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtoicr</h1> Updated: 05 June 2015 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtoicr - convert a PPM image into NCSA ICR format -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtoicr</B> +<b>ppmtoicr</b> -[<B>-windowname</B> <I>name</I>] +[<b>-windowname</b> <i>name</i>] -[<B>-expand</B> <I>expand</I>] +[<b>-expand</b> <i>expand</i>] -[<B>-display</B> <I>display</I>] +[<b>-display</b> <i>display</i>] -[<B>-rle</B>] +[<b>-rle</b>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ppmtoicr</b> reads a PPM file as input. Produces an NCSA Telnet Interactive Color Raster graphic file as output. -If <I>ppmfile</I> is not supplied, <b>ppmtoicr</b> reads from Standard +If <i>ppmfile</i> is not supplied, <b>ppmtoicr</b> reads from Standard Input. -<P>Interactive Color Raster (ICR) is a protocol for displaying raster +<p>Interactive Color Raster (ICR) is a protocol for displaying raster graphics on workstation screens. The protocol is implemented in NCSA Telnet for the Macintosh version 2.3. The ICR protocol shares characteristics of the Tektronix graphics terminal emulation protocol. For example, escape sequences are used to control the display. -<P><b>ppmtoicr</b> will output the appropriate sequences to create a +<p><b>ppmtoicr</b> will output the appropriate sequences to create a window of the dimensions of the input image, create a colormap of up to 256 colors on the display, then load the picture data into the window. -<P>Note that there is no icrtoppm tool - this transformation is one +<p>Note that there is no icrtoppm tool - this transformation is one way. -<H2 id="options">OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-windowname</B> <I>name</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtoicr</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Output will be displayed in <I>name</I> (Default is to use -<I>ppmfile</I> or "untitled" if the input is from Standard +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-windowname</b> <i>name</i> + +<dd>Output will be displayed in <i>name</i> (Default is to use +<i>ppmfile</i> or "untitled" if the input is from Standard Input). -<DT><B>-expand</B> <I>expand</I> +<dt><b>-expand</b> <i>expand</i> -<DD>Output will be expanded on display by factor <I>expand</I> (For +<dd>Output will be expanded on display by factor <i>expand</i> (For example, a value of 2 will cause four pixels to be displayed for every input pixel.) -<DT><B>-display</B> <I>display</I> +<dt><b>-display</b> <i>display</i> -<DD>Output will be displayed on screen numbered <I>display</I> +<dd>Output will be displayed on screen numbered <i>display</i> -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</H2> +<h2 id="examples">EXAMPLES</h2> To display a PPM file named <b>ppmfile</b> using the protocol: -<PRE> +<pre> ppmtoicr ppmfile -</PRE> +</pre> -This will create a window named <I>ppmfile</I> on the display with the -correct dimensions for <I>ppmfile</I>, create and download a colormap +This will create a window named <i>ppmfile</i> on the display with the +correct dimensions for <i>ppmfile</i>, create and download a colormap of up to 256 colors, and download the picture into the window. You may achieve the same effect with the following sequence: -<PRE> +<pre> ppmtoicr ppmfile > filename cat filename -</PRE> +</pre> <p>To display a GIF file using the protocol in a window titled after the input file, zoom the displayed image by a factor of 2, and run-length encode the data: -<PRE> +<pre> giftopnm giffile | ppmtoicr -w giffile -r -e 2 -</PRE> +</pre> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> -<P>The protocol uses frequent fflush() calls to speed up display. If -you save the output to a file for later display via <B>cat</B>, +<p>The protocol uses frequent fflush() calls to speed up display. If +you save the output to a file for later display via <b>cat</b>, <b>ppmtoicr</b> will draw much more slowly. In either case, increasing the blocksize limit on the display will speed up transmission substantially. -<H2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<P>NCSA Telnet for the Macintosh, University of Illinois at +<p>NCSA Telnet for the Macintosh, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign (1989) -<H2 id="history">HISTORY</H2> +<h2 id="history">HISTORY</h2> <p>Until Netpbm 10.71 (June 2015), there was a <b>-rle</b> option documented, which was said to cause the output to use run length encoding compression. @@ -127,23 +131,23 @@ ever use this program again, much less want to use run length encoding, we removed it from the documentation rather than fix the code. -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Copyright (C) 1990 by Kanthan Pillay (<A -HREF="mailto:svpillay@Princeton.EDU">svpillay@Princeton.EDU</A>), +Copyright (C) 1990 by Kanthan Pillay (<a +href="mailto:svpillay@Princeton.EDU">svpillay@Princeton.EDU</a>), Princeton University Computing and Information Technology. -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#examples">EXAMPLES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#history">HISTORY</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#examples">EXAMPLES</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#history">HISTORY</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtoleaf.html b/ppmtoleaf.html index ffad778b..de1be61f 100644 --- a/ppmtoleaf.html +++ b/ppmtoleaf.html @@ -1,55 +1,56 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtoleaf User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtoleaf</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtoleaf User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtoleaf</h1> Updated: 01 June 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtoleaf - convert PPM image to Interleaf image format -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtoleaf</B> +<b>ppmtoleaf</b> -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ppmtoleaf</b> reads an Interleaf image file as input and generates a PPM image as output. -<P>Interleaf is a now-defunct (actually purchased ca. 2000 by +<p>Interleaf is a now-defunct (actually purchased ca. 2000 by BroadVision) technical publishing software company. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B>, +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>ppmtoleaf</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<B><A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A></B> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b>, + +<b><a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a></b> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>The program is copyright (C) 1994 by Bill O'Donnell. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtomap.html b/ppmtomap.html index fbd93536..44b098f8 100644 --- a/ppmtomap.html +++ b/ppmtomap.html @@ -1,45 +1,48 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtomap User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtomap</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtomap User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtomap</h1> Updated: 06 January 2002 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtomap - create a map of all colors in a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P>This program exists only for backward compatibility. +<p>This program exists only for backward compatibility. -<P>Use <B>pnmcolormap</B>, which replaced it in January 2002. +<p>Use <b>pnmcolormap</b>, which replaced it in January 2002. -<P>One trivial difference between <B>ppmtomap</B> and <B>pnmcolormap -all</B> is that if the input is PBM or PGM, <B>ppmtomap</B> would -produce PPM output, whereas <B>pnmcolormap all</B> produces the same +<p>One trivial difference between <b>ppmtomap</b> and <b>pnmcolormap +all</b> is that if the input is PBM or PGM, <b>ppmtomap</b> would +produce PPM output, whereas <b>pnmcolormap all</b> produces the same kind of output as the input. This should not be very noticeable, though, as PBM and PGM images are usually usable anywhere a PPM image is. -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<B><A HREF="pnmcolormap.html">pnmcolormap</A></B> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>ppmtomap</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<b><a href="pnmcolormap.html">pnmcolormap</a></b> + + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtomitsu.html b/ppmtomitsu.html index 4847a22c..c491dc67 100644 --- a/ppmtomitsu.html +++ b/ppmtomitsu.html @@ -1,34 +1,34 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtomitsu User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtomitsu</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtomitsu User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtomitsu</h1> Updated: 24 March 2009 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtomitsu - convert a PPM image to a Mitsubishi S340-10 file -<H2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtomitsu</B> +<b>ppmtomitsu</b> -[-sharpness <I>val</I>] +[-sharpness <i>val</i>] -[<B>-enlarge</B> <I>val</I>] +[<b>-enlarge</b> <i>val</i>] -[<B>-media</B> <I>string</I>] +[<b>-media</b> <i>string</i>] -[<B>-copy</B> <I>val</I>] +[<b>-copy</b> <i>val</i>] -[<B>-dpi300</B>] +[<b>-dpi300</b>] -[<B>-tiny</B>] +[<b>-tiny</b>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<H2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ ppmtomitsu - convert a PPM image to a Mitsubishi S340-10 file format suitable to be printed by a Mitsubishi S340-10 printer, or any other Mitsubishi color sublimation printer. -<P>The Mitsubishi S340-10 Color Sublimation printer supports 24bit +<p>The Mitsubishi S340-10 Color Sublimation printer supports 24bit color. Images of the available sizes take so long to transfer that there is a fast method, employing a lookuptable, that ppmtomitsu will use if there is a maximum of 256 colors in the image. ppmtomitsu @@ -66,72 +66,76 @@ PPM input that <b>ppmtomitsu</b> will use properly. <h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-sharpness</B> <I>1-4</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtomitsu</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-sharpness</b> <i>1-4</i> + +<dd> "sharpness" designation. Default is to use the current sharpness. -<DT><B>-enlarge</B> <I>1-3</I> +<dt><b>-enlarge</b> <i>1-3</i> -<DD> +<dd> Enlarge by a factor; Default is 1 (no enlarge) -<DT><B>-media</B> {<B>A</B>|<B>A4</B>|<B>AS</B>|<B>A4S</B>} +<dt><b>-media</b> {<b>A</b>|<b>A4</b>|<b>AS</b>|<b>A4S</b>} -<DD> +<dd> Designate the media you're using. Default is 1184 x 1350, which will fit on any media. A is 1216 x 1350, A4 is 1184 x 1452, AS is 1216 x 1650 and A4S is 1184 x 1754. A warning: If you specify a different media than the printer currently has, the printer will wait until you put in the correct media or switch it off. -<DT><B>-copy</B> <I>1-9</I> +<dt><b>-copy</b> <i>1-9</i> -<DD> +<dd> The number of copies to produce. Default is 1. -<DT><B>-dpi300</B> +<dt><b>-dpi300</b> -<DD> +<dd> Double the number of allowed pixels for a S3600-30 Printer in S340-10 compatibility mode. (The S3600-30 has 300 dpi). -<DT><B>-tiny</B> +<dt><b>-tiny</b> -<DD> +<dd> Memory-saving, but always slow. The printer will get the data line-by-line in 24bit. It's probably a good idea to use this if your machine starts paging a lot without this option. -</DL> +</dl> -<H2 id="references">REFERENCES</H2> +<h2 id="references">REFERENCES</h2> Mitsubishi Sublimation Full Color Printer S340-10 Specifications of Parallel Interface LSP-F0232F -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</A>, -<A HREF="pamscale.html">pamscale</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> - -<H2 id="author">AUTHOR</H2> - -Copyright (C) 1992, 93 by S.Petra Zeidler, MPIfR Bonn, Germany. (<A -HREF="mailto:spz@specklec.mpifr-bonn.mpg.de">spz@specklec.mpifr-bonn.mpg.de</A>) - -<HR> -<H2 id="index">Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#description">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#options">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#references">REFERENCES</A> -<LI><A HREF="#seealso">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#author">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pnmquant.html">pnmquant</a>, +<a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Copyright (C) 1992, 93 by S.Petra Zeidler, MPIfR Bonn, Germany. (<a +href="mailto:spz@specklec.mpifr-bonn.mpg.de">spz@specklec.mpifr-bonn.mpg.de</a>) + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#references">REFERENCES</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtopcx.html b/ppmtopcx.html index aead0f52..f10647f4 100644 --- a/ppmtopcx.html +++ b/ppmtopcx.html @@ -1,41 +1,38 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtopcx User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtopcx</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtopcx User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtopcx</h1> Updated: 27 March 2004 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtopcx - convert a PPM image to a PCX file -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtopcx</B> +<b>ppmtopcx</b> -[<B>-24bit</B>] +[<b>-24bit</b>] -[<B>-8bit</B>] +[<b>-8bit</b>] -[<B>-packed</B>] +[<b>-packed</b>] -[<B>-stdpalette</b>] +[<b>-stdpalette</b>] -[<B>-palette=</b><i>palettefile</i>] +[<b>-palette=</b><i>palettefile</i>] -[<B>-planes=</b><i>planes</i>] +[<b>-planes=</b><i>planes</i>] -[<B>-xpos=</B><I>cols</I>] +[<b>-xpos=</b><i>cols</i>] -[<B>-ypos=</B><I>rows</I>] +[<b>-ypos=</b><i>rows</i>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -43,49 +40,53 @@ ppmtopcx - convert a PPM image to a PCX file as output. The type of the PCX file depends on the number of colors in the input image: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT>16 colors or fewer: +<dl compact> +<dt>16 colors or fewer: -<DD>1 bit/pixel, 1-4 planes. +<dd>1 bit/pixel, 1-4 planes. -<DT>more than 16 colors, but no more than 256: +<dt>more than 16 colors, but no more than 256: -<DD>8 bits/pixel, 1 plane, colormap at the end of the file. +<dd>8 bits/pixel, 1 plane, colormap at the end of the file. -<DT>More than 256 colors: +<dt>More than 256 colors: -<DD>24bit truecolor file (8 bits/pixel, 3 planes). +<dd>24bit truecolor file (8 bits/pixel, 3 planes). -</DL> +</dl> <p>You can override some of that and explicitly choose the format with the options below. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-24bit</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtopcx</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Produce a 24bit truecolor PCX file, even if the image has 256 +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-24bit</b> + +<dd>Produce a 24bit truecolor PCX file, even if the image has 256 colors or fewer. -<DT><B>-8bit</B> +<dt><b>-8bit</b> -<DD>Produce an 8bit (256 colors) PCX file, even if the image has 16 +<dd>Produce an 8bit (256 colors) PCX file, even if the image has 16 colors or fewer. <p>This option was added in Netpbm 10.18 (August 2003). -<DT><B>-packed</B> +<dt><b>-packed</b> -<DD>Use "packed pixel" format for files with 16 colors or +<dd>Use "packed pixel" format for files with 16 colors or fewer: 1, 2, or 4 bits/pixel, 1 plane. -<DT><B>-stdpalette</B> +<dt><b>-stdpalette</b> -<DD>Instead of computing a palette from the colors in the image, use +<dd>Instead of computing a palette from the colors in the image, use a standard, built-in 16 color palette. If the image contains a color that is not in the standard palette, <b>ppmtopcx</b> fails. @@ -137,14 +138,14 @@ those colors in your palette with <b>pnmremap</b>. <p>This option was new in Netpbhm 10.25 (October 2004). -<DT><B>-planes=</b><i>planes</i> +<dt><b>-planes=</b><i>planes</i> -<DD>Generate a PCX file with <i>planes</i> planes, even though the number +<dd>Generate a PCX file with <i>planes</i> planes, even though the number of colors in the image could be represented in fewer. This makes the file larger, but some PCX interpreters are capable of processing only certain numbers of planes. -<p>This is meaningful only when <b>ppmtopcx</B> generates an image in +<p>This is meaningful only when <b>ppmtopcx</b> generates an image in the 16 color palette format without packed pixels. Consequently, you cannot specify this option together with <b>-24bit</b> or <b>-8bit</b> or <b>-packed</b>. @@ -156,50 +157,46 @@ chooses 3 planes. <p>This option was new in Netpbm 10.21 (March 2004). -<DT><B>-xpos=</B><I>cols</I> +<dt><b>-xpos=</b><i>cols</i> -<DT><B>-ypos=</B><I>rows</I> +<dt><b>-ypos=</b><i>rows</i> -<DD> These options set the position of the image in some field +<dd> These options set the position of the image in some field (e.g. on a screen) in columns to the right of the left edge and rows below the top edge. The PCX format contains image position information. Don't confuse this with the position of an area of -interest within the image. For example, using <B>pnmpad</B> to add a +interest within the image. For example, using <b>pnmpad</b> to add a 10 pixel left border to an image and then converting that image to PCX with xpos = 0 is not the same as converting the original image to PCX and setting xpos = 10. -<P>The values may be from -32767 to 32768. +<p>The values may be from -32767 to 32768. -<P>The default for each is zero. +<p>The default for each is zero. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pcxtoppm.html">pcxtoppm</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="pcxtoppm.html">pcxtoppm</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHORS</H2> +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> -Copyright (C) 1994 by Ingo Wilken (<A -HREF="mailto:Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de">Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de</A>) +Copyright (C) 1994 by Ingo Wilken (<a +href="mailto:Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de">Ingo.Wilken@informatik.uni-oldenburg.de</a>) <p>Based on previous work by Michael Davidson. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtopi1.html b/ppmtopi1.html index 06f6fb73..2d2574a4 100644 --- a/ppmtopi1.html +++ b/ppmtopi1.html @@ -1,54 +1,55 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtopi1 Use Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtopi1</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtopi1 User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtopi1</h1> Updated: 19 July 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtopi1 - convert a PPM image into an Atari Degas .pi1 file -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtopi1</B> +<b>ppmtopi1</b> -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ppmtopi1</b> reads a PPM image as input and produces an Atari Degas .pi1 file as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="pi1toppm.html">pi1toppm</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A>, -<A HREF="pbmtopi3.html">pbmtopi3</A>, -<A HREF="pi3topbm.html">pi3topbm</A> - -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> - -Copyright (C) 1991 by Steve Belczyk (<A -HREF="mailto:seb3@gte.com">seb3@gte.com</A>) and Jef Poskanzer. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>ppmtopi1</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pi1toppm.html">pi1toppm</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a>, +<a href="pbmtopi3.html">pbmtopi3</a>, +<a href="pi3topbm.html">pi3topbm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Copyright (C) 1991 by Steve Belczyk (<a +href="mailto:seb3@gte.com">seb3@gte.com</a>) and Jef Poskanzer. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtopuzz.html b/ppmtopuzz.html index 4d734d49..f508a753 100644 --- a/ppmtopuzz.html +++ b/ppmtopuzz.html @@ -1,53 +1,54 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtopuzz User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtopuzz</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtopuzz User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtopuzz</h1> Updated: 22 August 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtopuzz - convert a PPM image to an X11 "puzzle" file -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtopuzz</B> +<b>ppmtopuzz</b> -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ppmtopuzz</b> reads a PPM image as input and produces an X11 "puzzle" file as output. A "puzzle" file is for use with the <b>puzzle</b> program included with the X11 distribution. -<b>puzzle</b>'s <B>-picture</B> option lets you specify an image file. +<b>puzzle</b>'s <b>-picture</b> option lets you specify an image file. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A>, +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>ppmtopuzz</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a>, <b>puzzle</b> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtorgb3.html b/ppmtorgb3.html index 18038cc2..16d9be6e 100644 --- a/ppmtorgb3.html +++ b/ppmtorgb3.html @@ -1,25 +1,22 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtorgb3 User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtorgb3</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtorgb3 User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtorgb3</h1> Updated: 10 January 1991 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtorgb3 - separate a PPM image into three PGMs -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtorgb3</B> +<b>ppmtorgb3</b> -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -33,31 +30,35 @@ input filename, stripping off any extension, and appending and <b>lenna.blu</b>. If the input comes from stdin, the names are <b>noname.red</b>, <b>noname.grn</b>, and <b>noname.blu</b>. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="rgb3toppm.html">rgb3toppm</A>, -<A HREF="pamchannel.html">pamchannel</A>, -<A HREF="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</A>, -<A HREF="pgmtoppm.html">pgmtoppm</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A>, -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>ppmtorgb3</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<a href="rgb3toppm.html">rgb3toppm</a>, +<a href="pamchannel.html">pamchannel</a>, +<a href="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</a>, +<a href="pgmtoppm.html">pgmtoppm</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a>, +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> + + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtosixel.html b/ppmtosixel.html index c7d1d9a7..256c81bb 100644 --- a/ppmtosixel.html +++ b/ppmtosixel.html @@ -1,29 +1,26 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtosixel User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtosixel</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtosixel User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtosixel</h1> Updated: 26 April 1991 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtosixel - convert a PPM image to DEC sixel format -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtosixel</B> +<b>ppmtosixel</b> -[<B>-raw</B>] +[<b>-raw</b>] -[<B>-margin</B>] +[<b>-margin</b>] -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -31,40 +28,42 @@ ppmtosixel - convert a PPM image to DEC sixel format commands (SIX) as output. The output is formatted for color printing, e.g. for a DEC LJ250 color inkjet printer. -<P>If RGB values from the PPM file do not have maxval=100, +<p>If RGB values from the PPM file do not have maxval=100, <b>ppmtosixel</b> rescales them to maxval 100. A printer control header and a color assignment table begin the SIX file. Image data is in a compressed format by default. A printer control footer ends the image file. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-raw</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ppmtosixel</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>If you specify this, each pixel will be explicitly described in -the image file. If <B>-raw</B> is not specified, output will default +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-raw</b> + +<dd>If you specify this, each pixel will be explicitly described in +the image file. If <b>-raw</b> is not specified, output will default to compressed format in which identical adjacent pixels are replaced by "repeat pixel" commands. A raw file is often an order of magnitude larger than a compressed file and prints much slower. -<DT><B>-margin</B> +<dt><b>-margin</b> -<DD>If you don't specify <B>-margin</B>, the image will start at the +<dd>If you don't specify <b>-margin</b>, the image will start at the left margin (of the window, paper, or whatever). If you <em>do</em> -specify <B>-margin</B>, a 1.5 inch left margin will offset the image. +specify <b>-margin</b>, a 1.5 inch left margin will offset the image. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>PRINTING</H2> +<h2 id="printing">PRINTING</h2> <p>Generally, sixel files must reach the printer unfiltered. Use the lpr -x option or <b>cat filename > /dev/tty0?</b>. -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> Upon rescaling, truncation of the least significant bits of RGB values may result in poor color conversion. If the original PPM maxval was @@ -73,28 +72,24 @@ actual RGB values from the ppm file are more or less retained, the color palette of the LJ250 may not match the colors on your screen. This seems to be a printer limitation. -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<A NAME="lbAI"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Rick Vinci. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">PRINTING</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAI">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#printing">PRINTING</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtoyuvsplit.html b/ppmtoyuvsplit.html index 604224c1..80c19330 100644 --- a/ppmtoyuvsplit.html +++ b/ppmtoyuvsplit.html @@ -1,31 +1,28 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtoyuvsplit User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtoyuvsplit</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtoyuvsplit User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtoyuvsplit</h1> Updated: 06 March 2003 -<BR> +<br> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtoyuvsplit - convert a PPM image to 3 subsampled raw YUV files -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ppmtoyuvsplit</B> -<I>basename</I> -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +<b>ppmtoyuvsplit</b> +<i>basename</i> +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ppmtoyuvsplit</b> reads a PPM image as input. Produces 3 raw -files <i>basename</i>.Y, <i>basename</i>.U and <i>basename.V</i> as +files <i>basename</i>.Y, <i>basename</i>.U and <i>basename</i>.V as output. <p>The output files are the subsampled raw YUV representation of the @@ -40,33 +37,37 @@ Y file is 4 times the size of the U file or V file. <p>The YUV values are scaled according to CCIR.601, as assumed by MPEG. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="yuvsplittoppm.html">yuvsplittoppm</A>, -<A HREF="ppmtoyuv.html">ppmtoyuv</a>, -<A HREF="ppmtoeyuv.html">ppmtoeyuv</A>, -<A HREF="ppmtompeg.html">ppmtompeg</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>ppmtoyuvsplit</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<a href="yuvsplittoppm.html">yuvsplittoppm</a>, +<a href="ppmtoyuv.html">ppmtoyuv</a>, +<a href="ppmtoeyuv.html">ppmtoeyuv</a>, +<a href="ppmtompeg.html">ppmtompeg</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<p>Copyright (C) 1993 by Andre Beck. (<A -HREF="mailto:Andre_Beck@IRS.Inf.TU-Dresden.de">Andre_Beck@IRS.Inf.TU-Dresden.de</A>) -<P>Based on ppmtoyuv.c +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p>Copyright (C) 1993 by Andre Beck. (<a +href="mailto:Andre_Beck@IRS.Inf.TU-Dresden.de">Andre_Beck@IRS.Inf.TU-Dresden.de</a>) + +<p>Based on ppmtoyuv.c + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ppmtv.html b/ppmtv.html index 3a77b37a..7dd3de2d 100644 --- a/ppmtv.html +++ b/ppmtv.html @@ -1,26 +1,23 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ppmtv User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ppmtv</H1> +<html><head><title>Ppmtv User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ppmtv</h1> Updated: 16 November 1993 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ppmtv - make a PPM image look like taken from an American TV -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> ppmtv -<I>dimfactor</I> +<i>dimfactor</i> -[<I>ppmfile</I>] +[<i>ppmfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -29,7 +26,7 @@ image data down by the specified dim factor. This factor may be in the range of 0.0 (the alternate lines are totally black) to 1.0 (original image). -<P>This creates an effect similar to what I've once seen in the video +<p>This creates an effect similar to what I've once seen in the video clip 'You could be mine' by Guns'n'Roses. In the scene I'm talking about you can see John Connor on his motorbike, looking up from the water trench (?) he's standing in. While the camera pulls back, the @@ -37,26 +34,30 @@ image gets 'normal' by brightening up the alternate rows of it. I thought this would be an interesting effect to try in MPEG. I did not yet check this out, however. Try for yourself. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A>, -<A HREF="ppmdim.html">ppmdim</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>ppmtv</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a>, +<a href="ppmdim.html">ppmdim</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1993 by Frank Neumann -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/psidtopgm.html b/psidtopgm.html index d6854d05..526470de 100644 --- a/psidtopgm.html +++ b/psidtopgm.html @@ -1,33 +1,30 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Psidtopgm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>psidtopgm</H1> +<html><head><title>Psidtopgm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>psidtopgm</h1> Updated: 02 August 89 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> psidtopgm - convert PostScript "image" data to a PGM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>psidtopgm</B> <I>width</i> <i>height</i> <i>bits/sample</I> [<I>imagedata</I>] +<b>psidtopgm</b> <i>width</i> <i>height</i> <i>bits/sample</i> [<i>imagedata</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>psidtopgm</b> reads the "image" data from a PostScript file as input and produces a PGM image as output. -<P>This program is obsoleted by <B>pstopnm</B>. +<p>This program is obsoleted by <b>pstopnm</b>. -What follows was written before <B>pstopnm </B> existed. +What follows was written before <b>pstopnm </b> existed. -<P>This is a very simple and limited program, and is here only because +<p>This is a very simple and limited program, and is here only because so many people have asked for it. To use it you have to <em>manually</em> extract the readhexstring data portion from your PostScript file, and then give the width, height, and bits/sample on @@ -35,31 +32,35 @@ the command line. Before you attempt this, you should <em>at least</em> read the description of the "image" operator in the PostScript Language Reference Manual. -<P>It would probably not be too hard to write a script that uses this +<p>It would probably not be too hard to write a script that uses this filter to read a specific variety of PostScript image, but the variation is too great to make a general-purpose reader. Unless, of course, you want to write a full-fledged PostScript interpreter... -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pnmtops.html">pnmtops</A>, -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>psidtopgm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pnmtops.html">pnmtops</a>, +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/qrttoppm.html b/qrttoppm.html index 112bf500..611c2a1c 100644 --- a/qrttoppm.html +++ b/qrttoppm.html @@ -1,49 +1,50 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Qrttoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>qrttoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Qrttoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>qrttoppm</h1> Updated: 25 August 1989 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> qrttoppm - convert output from the QRT ray tracer to a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>qrttoppm</B> +<b>qrttoppm</b> -[<I>qrtfile</I>] +[<i>qrtfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>qrttoppm</b> reads a QRT file as input and produces a PPM image as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>qrttoppm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/rawtopgm.html b/rawtopgm.html index a083b82d..17175a45 100644 --- a/rawtopgm.html +++ b/rawtopgm.html @@ -1,38 +1,35 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Rawtopgm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>rawtopgm</H1> +<html><head><title>Rawtopgm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>rawtopgm</h1> Updated: 14 September 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> rawtopgm - convert raw grayscale bytes to a PGM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>rawtopgm</B> +<b>rawtopgm</b> -[<B>-bpp</B> [<B>1</B>|<B>2</B>]] +[<b>-bpp</b> [<b>1</b>|<b>2</b>]] -[<B>-littleendian</B>] +[<b>-littleendian</b>] -[<B>-maxval</B> <I>N</I>] +[<b>-maxval</b> <i>N</i>] -[<B>-headerskip</B> <I>N</I>] +[<b>-headerskip</b> <i>N</i>] -[<B>-rowskip</B> <I>N</I>] +[<b>-rowskip</b> <i>N</i>] -[<B>-tb</B>|<B>-topbottom</B>] +[<b>-tb</b>|<b>-topbottom</b>] -[<I>width</I> <I>height</I>] +[<i>width</i> <i>height</i>] -[<I>imagefile</I>] +[<i>imagefile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -42,129 +39,129 @@ numbers, either one or two bytes each, either bigendian or littleendian, representing gray values. They may be arranged either top to bottom, left to right or bottom to top, left to right. There may be arbitrary header information at the start of the file (to which -<B>rawtopgm</B> pays no attention at all other than the header's +<b>rawtopgm</b> pays no attention at all other than the header's size). -<P>Arguments to <B>rawtopgm</B> tell how to interpret the pixels (a +<p>Arguments to <b>rawtopgm</b> tell how to interpret the pixels (a function that is served by a header in a regular graphics format). -<P>The <I>width</I> and <I>height</I> parameters tell the dimensions -of the image. If you omit these parameters, <B>rawtopgm</B> assumes +<p>The <i>width</i> and <i>height</i> parameters tell the dimensions +of the image. If you omit these parameters, <b>rawtopgm</b> assumes it is a quadratic image and bases the dimensions on the size of the -input stream. If this size is not a perfect square, <B>rawtopgm</B> +input stream. If this size is not a perfect square, <b>rawtopgm</b> fails. -<P>When you don't specify <I>width</I> and <I>height</I>, -<B>rawtopgm</B> reads the entire input stream into storage at once, -which may take a lot of storage. Otherwise, <B>rawtopgm</B> +<p>When you don't specify <i>width</i> and <i>height</i>, +<b>rawtopgm</b> reads the entire input stream into storage at once, +which may take a lot of storage. Otherwise, <b>rawtopgm</b> ordinarily stores only one row at a time. -<P>If you don't specify <I>imagefile</I>, or specify <B>-</B>, the +<p>If you don't specify <i>imagefile</i>, or specify <b>-</b>, the input is from Standard Input. -<P>The PGM output is to Standard Output. +<p>The PGM output is to Standard Output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-maxval</B> <I>N</I> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>rawtopgm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD><I>N</I> is the maxval for the gray values in the input, and is +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-maxval</b> <i>N</i> + +<dd><i>N</i> is the maxval for the gray values in the input, and is also the maxval of the PGM output image. The default is the maximum value that can be represented in the number of bytes used for each sample (i.e. 255 or 65535). -<DT><B>-bpp</B> [<B>1</B>|<B>2</B>] +<dt><b>-bpp</b> [<b>1</b>|<b>2</b>] -<DD>tells the number of bytes that represent each sample in the input. -If the value is <B>2</B>, The most significant byte is first in the +<dd>tells the number of bytes that represent each sample in the input. +If the value is <b>2</b>, The most significant byte is first in the stream. -<P>The default is 1 byte per sample. +<p>The default is 1 byte per sample. -<DT><B>-littleendian</B> +<dt><b>-littleendian</b> -<DD>says that the bytes of each input sample are ordered with the -least significant byte first. Without this option, <B>rawtopgm</B> +<dd>says that the bytes of each input sample are ordered with the +least significant byte first. Without this option, <b>rawtopgm</b> assumes MSB first. This obviously has no effect when there is only one byte per sample. -<DT><B>-headerskip</B> <I>N</I> +<dt><b>-headerskip</b> <i>N</i> -<DD><B>rawtopgm</B> skips over <I>N</I> bytes at the beginning of the +<dd><b>rawtopgm</b> skips over <i>N</i> bytes at the beginning of the stream and reads the image immediately after. The default is 0. -<P>This is useful when the input is actually some graphics format that +<p>This is useful when the input is actually some graphics format that has a descriptive header followed by an ordinary raster, and you don't have a program that understands the header or you want to ignore the header. -<DT><B>-rowskip</B> <I>N</I> +<dt><b>-rowskip</b> <i>N</i> -<DD>If there is padding at the ends of the rows, you can skip it with +<dd>If there is padding at the ends of the rows, you can skip it with this option. Note that rowskip need not be an integer. Amazingly, I once had an image with 0.376 bytes of padding per row. This turned out to be due to a file-transfer problem, but I was still able to read the image. -<P>Skipping a fractional byte per row means skipping one byte per +<p>Skipping a fractional byte per row means skipping one byte per multiple rows. -<DT><B>-bt -bottomfirst</B> +<dt><b>-bt -bottomfirst</b> -<DD>By default, <B>rawtopgm</B> assumes the pixels in the input go top -to bottom, left to right. If you specify <B>-bt</B> or -<B>-bottomfirst</B>, <B>rawtopgm</B> assumes the pixels go bottom to +<dd>By default, <b>rawtopgm</b> assumes the pixels in the input go top +to bottom, left to right. If you specify <b>-bt</b> or +<b>-bottomfirst</b>, <b>rawtopgm</b> assumes the pixels go bottom to top, left to right. The Molecular Dynamics and Leica confocal format, for example, use the latter arrangement. -<P>If you don't specify <B>-bt</B> when you should or vice versa, the +<p>If you don't specify <b>-bt</b> when you should or vice versa, the resulting image is upside down, which you can correct with -<B>pamflip</B>. +<b>pamflip</b>. -<P>This option causes <B>rawtopgm</B> to read the entire input stream +<p>This option causes <b>rawtopgm</b> to read the entire input stream into storage at once, which may take a lot of storage. Normally, -<B>rawtopgm</B> stores only one row at a time. +<b>rawtopgm</b> stores only one row at a time. -<P>For backwards compatibility, <B>rawtopgm</B> also accepts <B>-tb -</B> and <B>-topbottom</B> to mean exactly the same thing. The +<p>For backwards compatibility, <b>rawtopgm</b> also accepts <b>-tb +</b> and <b>-topbottom</b> to mean exactly the same thing. The reasons these are named backwards is that the original author thought of it as specifying that the wrong results of assuming the data is top to bottom should be corrected by flipping the result top for bottom. Today, we think of it as simply specifying the format of the input data so that there are no wrong results. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pgm.html">pgm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="rawtoppm.html">rawtoppm</A></B>, +<b><a href="rawtoppm.html">rawtoppm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pamflip.html">pamflip</A></B> +<b><a href="pamflip.html">pamflip</a></b> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHORS</H2> +<h2 id="authors">AUTHORS</h2> Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. -<BR> - -Modified June 1993 by Oliver Trepte, <A -HREF="mailto:oliver@fysik4.kth.se">oliver@fysik4.kth.se</A> - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHORS</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<br> + +Modified June 1993 by Oliver Trepte, <a +href="mailto:oliver@fysik4.kth.se">oliver@fysik4.kth.se</a> + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#authors">AUTHORS</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/rawtoppm.html b/rawtoppm.html index 2f274bfa..2a90300b 100644 --- a/rawtoppm.html +++ b/rawtoppm.html @@ -1,35 +1,32 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Rawtoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>rawtoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Rawtoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>rawtoppm</h1> Updated: 06 February 1991 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> rawtoppm - convert a stream of raw RGB bytes to a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>rawtoppm</B> +<b>rawtoppm</b> -[<B>-headerskip</B> <I>N</I>] +[<b>-headerskip</b> <i>N</i>] -[<B>-rowskip</B> <I>N</I>] +[<b>-rowskip</b> <i>N</i>] [ -<B>-rgb</B>|<B>-rbg</B>|<B>-grb</B> -|<B>-gbr</B>|<B>-brg</B>|<B>-bgr</B> +<b>-rgb</b>|<b>-rbg</b>|<b>-grb</b> +|<b>-gbr</b>|<b>-brg</b>|<b>-bgr</b> ] -[<B>-interpixel</B>|<B>-interrow</B>] <I>width</i> <i>height</I> +[<b>-interpixel</b>|<b>-interrow</b>] <i>width</i> <i>height</i> -[<I>imagedata</I>] +[<i>imagedata</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -44,64 +41,64 @@ PPM 255. If they are actually bottom first, the resulting PPM is upside down, so run it through <b>pamflip -tb</b>. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-headerskip</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>rawtoppm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Skip over this many bytes at the beginning of the input stream. +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-headerskip</b> + +<dd>Skip over this many bytes at the beginning of the input stream. Use this option when the input has some kind of header followed by a raster suitable for <b>rawtoppm</b>. -<DT><B>-rowskip</B> +<dt><b>-rowskip</b> -<DD>Skip this many bytes at the end of each row of the raster. (Some +<dd>Skip this many bytes at the end of each row of the raster. (Some input streams have padding at the end of rows). -<DT><B>-rgb -rbg -grb -gbr -brg -bgr</B> +<dt><b>-rgb -rbg -grb -gbr -brg -bgr</b> -<DD>This option specifies the order of the color components for each -pixel. The default is <B>-rgb</B>. +<dd>This option specifies the order of the color components for each +pixel. The default is <b>-rgb</b>. -<DT><B>-interpixel -interrow</B> +<dt><b>-interpixel -interrow</b> -<DD>These options specify how the colors are interleaved. The default -is <B>-interpixel</B>, meaning interleaved by pixel. A byte of red, a +<dd>These options specify how the colors are interleaved. The default +is <b>-interpixel</b>, meaning interleaved by pixel. A byte of red, a byte of green, and a byte of blue, or whatever color order you -specified. <B>-interrow</B> means interleaved by row - a row of red, +specified. <b>-interrow</b> means interleaved by row - a row of red, a row of green, a row of blue, assuming standard rgb color order. An -<B>-interplane</B> option - all the red pixels, then all the green, +<b>-interplane</b> option - all the red pixels, then all the green, then all the blue - would be an obvious extension, but is not implemented. You could get the same effect by splitting the file into three parts (perhaps using <b>dd</b>), turning each part into a PGM file with <b>rawtopgm</b>, and then combining them with <b>rgb3toppm</b>. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A>, -<A HREF="rawtopgm.html">rawtopgm</A>, -<A HREF="rgb3toppm.html">rgb3toppm</A>, -<A HREF="pamflip.html">pamflip</A> +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a>, +<a href="rawtopgm.html">rawtopgm</a>, +<a href="rgb3toppm.html">rgb3toppm</a>, +<a href="pamflip.html">pamflip</a> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/rgb3toppm.html b/rgb3toppm.html index 10c715ed..b5dd720f 100644 --- a/rgb3toppm.html +++ b/rgb3toppm.html @@ -1,54 +1,55 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Rgb3toppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>rgb3toppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Rgb3toppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>rgb3toppm</h1> Updated: 15 February 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> rgb3toppm - combine three PGM images (R, G, B) into one PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>rgb3toppm</B> <I>redpgmfile</I> <I>greenpgmfile</I> <I>bluepgmfile</I> +<b>rgb3toppm</b> <i>redpgmfile</i> <i>greenpgmfile</i> <i>bluepgmfile</i> -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><B>rgb3toppm</B> reads three PGM images as input, taking each to +<p><b>rgb3toppm</b> reads three PGM images as input, taking each to represent one component (red, green, and blue) of a color image. It produces a PPM image as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="ppmtorgb3.html">ppmtorgb3</A>, -<A HREF="pamstack.html">pamstack</A>, -<A HREF="pgmtoppm.html">pgmtoppm</A>, -<A HREF="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A>, -<A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>rgb3toppm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<a href="ppmtorgb3.html">ppmtorgb3</a>, +<a href="pamstack.html">pamstack</a>, +<a href="pgmtoppm.html">pgmtoppm</a>, +<a href="ppmtopgm.html">ppmtopgm</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a>, +<a href="pgm.html">pgm</a> + + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/sirtopnm.html b/sirtopnm.html index f42148cc..44c44e71 100644 --- a/sirtopnm.html +++ b/sirtopnm.html @@ -1,24 +1,21 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Sirtopnm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>sirtopnm</H1> +<html><head><title>Sirtopnm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>sirtopnm</h1> Updated: 20 March 1991 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> sirtopnm - convert a Solitaire file to PNM -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>sirtopnm</B> +<b>sirtopnm</b> -[<I>sirfile</I>] +[<i>sirfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -28,27 +25,31 @@ on the input file - if it's an MGI TYPE 17 file, <b>sirtopnm</b> generates a PGM file. If it's an MGI TYPE 11 file, <b>sirtopnm</b> generates PPM. The program tells you which type it is writing. -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="pnmtosir.html">pnmtosir</A>, -<A HREF="pnm.html">pnm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>sirtopnm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pnmtosir.html">pnmtosir</a>, +<a href="pnm.html">pnm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> Copyright (C) 1991 by Marvin Landis. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/sldtoppm.html b/sldtoppm.html index 1573cd06..1ea3f2e8 100644 --- a/sldtoppm.html +++ b/sldtoppm.html @@ -1,187 +1,183 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Sldtoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>sldtoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Sldtoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>sldtoppm</h1> Updated: 10 October 1991 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> sldtoppm - convert an AutoCAD slide file to a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>sldtoppm</B> -[<B>-adjust</B>] -[<B>-dir</B>] -[{<B>-height</B>|<B>-ysize</B>} <I>s</I>] -[<B>-info</B>] -[{<B>-lib</B>|<B>-Lib</B>} <I>name</I>] -[<B>-scale</B> <I>s</I>] -[<B>-verbose</B>] -[{<B>-width</B>|<B>-xsize</B>} <I>s</I>] -[<I>slidefile</I>] +<b>sldtoppm</b> +[<b>-adjust</b>] +[<b>-dir</b>] +[{<b>-height</b>|<b>-ysize</b>} <i>s</i>] +[<b>-info</b>] +[{<b>-lib</b>|<b>-Lib</b>} <i>name</i>] +[<b>-scale</b> <i>s</i>] +[<b>-verbose</b>] +[{<b>-width</b>|<b>-xsize</b>} <i>s</i>] +[<i>slidefile</i>] -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>sldtoppm</b> reads an AutoCAD® slide file and outputs a PPM -image. If you don't specify <I>slidefile</I>, <b>sldtoppm</b> reads +image. If you don't specify <i>slidefile</i>, <b>sldtoppm</b> reads input from Standard Input. <b>sldtoppm</b> uses the <b>ppmdraw</b> library to convert the vector and polygon information in the slide file to a raster; see the file <b>ppmdraw.h</b> for details on this package. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-adjust</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>sldtoppm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>If the display on which the slide file was created had non-square -pixels, when you process the slide with <B>sldtoppm</B> and don't -specify <B>-adjust</B>, <b>sldtoppm</b> issues the following warning; +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-adjust</b> + +<dd>If the display on which the slide file was created had non-square +pixels, when you process the slide with <b>sldtoppm</b> and don't +specify <b>-adjust</b>, <b>sldtoppm</b> issues the following warning; <blockquote> Warning - pixels on source screen were non-square. </blockquote> -<p>Specifying <B>-adjust</B> will correct the image width to -compensate. Specifying the <B>-adjust</B> option causes -<B>sldtoppm</B> to scale the width of the image so that pixels in the +<p>Specifying <b>-adjust</b> will correct the image width to +compensate. Specifying the <b>-adjust</b> option causes +<b>sldtoppm</b> to scale the width of the image so that pixels in the resulting PPM image are square (and hence circles appear as true circles, not ellipses). The scaling is performed in the vector domain, before scan converting the objects. The results are, therefore, superior in appearance to what you'd obtain were you to -perform the equivalent scaling with <B>pamscale</B> after the bitmap +perform the equivalent scaling with <b>pamscale</b> after the bitmap had been created. -<DT><B>-dir</B> +<dt><b>-dir</b> -<DD>The input is assumed to be an AutoCAD slide library file. A +<dd>The input is assumed to be an AutoCAD slide library file. A directory listing each slide in the library is printed on standard error. -<DT><B>-height</B> <I>size</I> +<dt><b>-height</b> <i>size</i> -<DD>Scales the image in the vector domain so it is <I>size</I> pixels -in height. If you don't specify <B>-width</B> or <B>-xsize</B>, +<dd>Scales the image in the vector domain so it is <i>size</i> pixels +in height. If you don't specify <b>-width</b> or <b>-xsize</b>, <b>sldtoppm</b> adjusts the width to preserve the pixel aspect ratio. -<DT><B>-info</B> +<dt><b>-info</b> -<DD>Dump the slide file header on standard error, displaying the original +<dd>Dump the slide file header on standard error, displaying the original screen size and aspect ratio among other information. -<DT><B>-lib</B> <I>name</I> +<dt><b>-lib</b> <i>name</i> -<DD>Extracts the slide with the given <I>name</I> from the slide +<dd>Extracts the slide with the given <i>name</i> from the slide library given as input. <b>sldtoppm</b> converts the specified -<I>name</I> to upper case. +<i>name</i> to upper case. -<DT><B>-Lib</B><I> name</I> +<dt><b>-Lib</b><i> name</i> -<DD>Extracts the slide with the given <I>name</I> from the slide -library given as input. <b>sldtoppm</b> uses <I>name</I> in the case +<dd>Extracts the slide with the given <i>name</i> from the slide +library given as input. <b>sldtoppm</b> uses <i>name</i> in the case specified; it does not convert it to upper case. -<DT><B>-scale</B> <I>s</I> +<dt><b>-scale</b> <i>s</i> -<DD>Scales the image by factor <I>s</I>, which may be any floating +<dd>Scales the image by factor <i>s</i>, which may be any floating point value greater than zero. <b>sldtoppm</b> does the scaling after aspect ratio adjustment, if any. Since it does the scaling in the vector domain, before rasterisation, the results look much better than -running the output of <B>sldtoppm</B> through <B>pamscale</B>. +running the output of <b>sldtoppm</b> through <b>pamscale</b>. -<DT><B>-verbose</B> +<dt><b>-verbose</b> -<DD>Dumps the slide file header and lists every vector and polygon +<dd>Dumps the slide file header and lists every vector and polygon to Standard Error. -<DT><B>-width</B> <I>size</I> +<dt><b>-width</b> <i>size</i> -<DD>Scales the image in the vector domain so it is <I>size</I> pixels -wide. If you don't specify <B>-height</B> or <B>-ysize</B>, +<dd>Scales the image in the vector domain so it is <i>size</i> pixels +wide. If you don't specify <b>-height</b> or <b>-ysize</b>, <b>sldtoppm</b> adjusts the height to preserve the pixel aspect ratio. -<DT><B>-xsize</B> <I>size</I> +<dt><b>-xsize</b> <i>size</i> -<DD>Scales the image in the vector domain so it is <I>size</I> pixels -wide. If you don't specify <B>-height</B> or <B>-ysize</B>, +<dd>Scales the image in the vector domain so it is <i>size</i> pixels +wide. If you don't specify <b>-height</b> or <b>-ysize</b>, <b>sldtoppm</b> adjusts the height to preserve the pixel aspect ratio. -<DT><B>-ysize</B> <I>size</I> +<dt><b>-ysize</b> <i>size</i> -<DD>Scales the image in the vector domain so it is <I>size</I> pixels -in height. If you don't specify <B>-width</B> or <B>-xsize</B>, +<dd>Scales the image in the vector domain so it is <i>size</i> pixels +in height. If you don't specify <b>-width</b> or <b>-xsize</b>, <b>sldtoppm</b> adjusts the width to preserve the pixel aspect ratio. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> <p><b>sldtoppm</b> can convert only Level 2 slides. Level 1 format has been obsolete since the advent of AutoCAD Release 9 in 1987, and was not portable across machine architectures. -<P>Slide library items with names containing 8 bit (such as ISO) or 16 +<p>Slide library items with names containing 8 bit (such as ISO) or 16 bit (Kanji, for example) characters may not be found when chosen with -the <B>-lib</B> option unless <B>sldtoppm</B> was built with character +the <b>-lib</b> option unless <b>sldtoppm</b> was built with character set conversion functions appropriate to the locale. You can always retrieve slides from libraries regardless of the character set by -using the <B>-Lib</B> option and specifying the precise name of -library member. Use the <B>-dir</B> option to list the slides in a +using the <b>-Lib</b> option and specifying the precise name of +library member. Use the <b>-dir</b> option to list the slides in a library if you're unsure of the exact name. -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -AutoCAD Reference Manual: <I>Slide File Format</I>, +AutoCAD Reference Manual: <i>Slide File Format</i>, -<B><A HREF="pamscale.html">pamscale</A></B>, +<b><a href="pamscale.html">pamscale</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -<PRE> +<pre> John Walker Autodesk SA Avenue des Champs-Montants 14b CH-2074 MARIN Suisse/Schweiz/Svizzera/Svizra/Switzerland - <B>Usenet:</B><A HREF="mailto:kelvin@Autodesk.com">kelvin@Autodesk.com</A> - <B>Fax:</B>038/33 88 15 - <B>Voice:</B>038/33 76 33 -</PRE> + <b>Usenet:</b><a href="mailto:kelvin@Autodesk.com">kelvin@Autodesk.com</a> + <b>Fax:</b>038/33 88 15 + <b>Voice:</b>038/33 76 33 +</pre> -<P> +<p> Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, without any conditions or restrictions. This software is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty. -<P>AutoCAD and Autodesk are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">BUGS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p>AutoCAD and Autodesk are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/spctoppm.html b/spctoppm.html index 5e9ba684..4ce36913 100644 --- a/spctoppm.html +++ b/spctoppm.html @@ -1,51 +1,52 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Spctoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>spctoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Spctoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>spctoppm</h1> Updated: 19 July 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> spctoppm - convert an Atari compressed Spectrum file to a PPM -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>spctoppm</B> +<b>spctoppm</b> -[<I>spcfile</I>] +[<i>spcfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>spctoppm</b> reads an Atari compressed Spectrum file as input and produces a PPM image as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="sputoppm.html">sputoppm</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> - -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> - -Copyright (C) 1991 by Steve Belczyk (<A -HREF="mailto:seb3@gte.com">seb3@gte.com</A>) and Jef Poskanzer. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>spctoppm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="sputoppm.html">sputoppm</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Copyright (C) 1991 by Steve Belczyk (<a +href="mailto:seb3@gte.com">seb3@gte.com</a>) and Jef Poskanzer. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/spottopgm.html b/spottopgm.html index ff51fbac..fe657c99 100644 --- a/spottopgm.html +++ b/spottopgm.html @@ -1,33 +1,35 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Spottopgm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>spottopgm</H1> +<html><head><title>Spottopgm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>spottopgm</h1> Updated: 22 July 2004 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> spottopgm - convert SPOT satellite images to a PGM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNTAX</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> <b>spottopgm</b> [<b>-1</b>|<b>-2</b>|<b>-3</b>] [<i>Firstcol</i> <i>Firstline</i> <i>Lastcol</i> <i>Lastline</i>] <i>inputfile</i> -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-1</b> -<DT><B>-2</b> -<DT><B>-3</b> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>spottopgm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DD>Extract the given color from the SPOT image. The colors are +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-1</b> +<dt><b>-2</b> +<dt><b>-3</b> + +<dd>Extract the given color from the SPOT image. The colors are infrared, visible light, and ultraviolet, although I don't know which corresponds to which number. If the image is in color, <b>spottopgm</b> announces this on Standard Error. The default color @@ -36,67 +38,61 @@ is 1. </dl> -<A NAME="parameters"> </A> -<H2>PARAMETERS</H2> -<DL> +<h2 id="parameters">PARAMETERS</h2> +<dl> -<DT><I>Firstcol Firstline Lastcol Lastline</I> +<dt><i>Firstcol Firstline Lastcol Lastline</i> -<DD>Extract the specified rectangle from the SPOT image. Most SPOT +<dd>Extract the specified rectangle from the SPOT image. Most SPOT images are 3000 lines long and 3000 or more columns wide. Unfortunately, the SPOT format only gives the width and not the length. The width is printed on standard error. The default rectangle is the width of the input image by 3000 lines. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<b>spottopgm</b> converts the named <B>inputfile</B> to PGM format, +<b>spottopgm</b> converts the named <b>inputfile</b> to PGM format, defaulting to the first color and the whole SPOT image unless you specify otherwise with the options. -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> -<P><B>spottopgm</B> doesn't determine the length of the input file; +<p><b>spottopgm</b> doesn't determine the length of the input file; this would involve two passes over the input file. It defaults to 3000 lines instead. -<P><B>spottopgm</b> could extract a three-color image (as a PPM), but +<p><b>spottopgm</b> could extract a three-color image (as a PPM), but I didn't feel like making the program more complicated than it is now. Besides, there is no one-to-one correspondence between red, green, blue and infrared, visible and ultraviolet. -<P>I've had only a limited number of SPOT images to play with, and +<p>I've had only a limited number of SPOT images to play with, and therefore wouldn't guarantee that this will work on any other images. -<A NAME="lbAH"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Warren Toomey <A -HREF="mailto:wkt@csadfa.cs.adfa.oz.au">wkt@csadfa.cs.adfa.oz.au</A> +Warren Toomey <a +href="mailto:wkt@csadfa.cs.adfa.oz.au">wkt@csadfa.cs.adfa.oz.au</a> -<A NAME="lbAI"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<P><B><A HREF="pgm.html">pgm</A></B> +<p><b><a href="pgm.html">pgm</a></b> -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNTAX</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAH">AUTHOR</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAI">SEE ALSO</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#parameters">PARAMETERS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/tgatoppm.html b/tgatoppm.html index 45db603b..cfab4c82 100644 --- a/tgatoppm.html +++ b/tgatoppm.html @@ -1,83 +1,80 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Tgatoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>tgatoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Tgatoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>tgatoppm</h1> Updated: 02 April 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> tgatoppm - convert TrueVision Targa file to a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>tgatoppm</B> - [<B>--alphaout=</B>{<I>alpha-filename</I>,<B>-</B>}] - [<B>--headerdump</B>] <I>tga-filename</I> +<b>tgatoppm</b> + [<b>--alphaout=</b>{<i>alpha-filename</i>,<b>-</b>}] + [<b>--headerdump</b>] <i>tga-filename</i> -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>tgatoppm</b> reads a TrueVision Targa file as input and produces a PPM image as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<P>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>tgatoppm</b> recognizes the following +command line options: -<DL COMPACT> +<p>All options can be abbreviated to their shortest unique prefix. -<DT><B>--alphaout=</B><I>alpha-filename</I> +<dl compact> -<DD><B>tgatoppm </B> creates a PGM image containing the transparency channel +<dt><b>--alphaout=</b><i>alpha-filename</i> + +<dd><b>tgatoppm </b> creates a PGM image containing the transparency channel values in the input image. If the input image doesn't contain a -transparency channel, the <I>alpha-filename</I> file contains all zero -(transparent) transparency values. If you don't specify <B>--alphaout</B>, -<B>tgatoppm</B> does not generate an alpha file, and if the input -image has a transparency channel, <B>tgatoppm</B> simply discards it. +transparency channel, the <i>alpha-filename</i> file contains all zero +(transparent) transparency values. If you don't specify <b>--alphaout</b>, +<b>tgatoppm</b> does not generate an alpha file, and if the input +image has a transparency channel, <b>tgatoppm</b> simply discards it. -<P>If you specify <B>-</B> as the filename, <B>tgatoppm</B> writes the +<p>If you specify <b>-</b> as the filename, <b>tgatoppm</b> writes the transparency output to Standard Output and discards the image. -<P>See <B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B> for one way to use +<p>See <b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b> for one way to use the transparency output file. -<DT><B>--headerdump</B> +<dt><b>--headerdump</b> -<DD>Causes <b>tgatoppm</b> to dump information from the TGA header to +<dd>Causes <b>tgatoppm</b> to dump information from the TGA header to Standard Error. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="ppmtotga.html">ppmtotga</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="ppmtotga.html">ppmtotga</a></b>, +<b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Partially based on tga2rast, version 1.0, by Ian J. MacPhedran. -<P>Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p>Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/wbmptopbm.html b/wbmptopbm.html index a6b9a8a5..891c74d1 100644 --- a/wbmptopbm.html +++ b/wbmptopbm.html @@ -1,61 +1,61 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Wbmptopbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>wbmptopbm</H1> +<html><head><title>Wbmptopbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>wbmptopbm</h1> Updated: 19 November 1999 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> wbmptopbm - convert a wireless bitmap (wbmp) file to a PBM -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>wbmptopbm</B> +<b>wbmptopbm</b> -[<I>wbmpfile</I>] +[<i>wbmpfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. -<P><b>wbmptopbm</b> reads a wbmp file as input and produces a PBM +<p><b>wbmptopbm</b> reads a wbmp file as input and produces a PBM image as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>LIMITATIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>wbmptopbm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="limitations">LIMITATIONS</h2> <p><b>wbmptopbm</b> recognizes only WBMP type 0. This is the only type specified in the WAP 1.1 specifications. -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A></B>, +<b><a href="pbm.html">pbm</a></b>, -<B><A HREF="pbmtowbmp.html">pbmtowbmp</A></B>, +<b><a href="pbmtowbmp.html">pbmtowbmp</a></b>, Wireless Application Environment Specification. -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> - -Copyright (C) 1999 Terje Sannum <<A -HREF="mailto:terje@looplab.com">terje@looplab.com</A>>. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">LIMITATIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Copyright (C) 1999 Terje Sannum <<a +href="mailto:terje@looplab.com">terje@looplab.com</a>>. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#limitations">LIMITATIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ximtoppm.html b/ximtoppm.html index 3b0605e5..91332a6f 100644 --- a/ximtoppm.html +++ b/ximtoppm.html @@ -1,26 +1,23 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ximtoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ximtoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Ximtoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ximtoppm</h1> Updated: April 2, 2000 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> ximtoppm - convert an Xim file to a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ximtoppm</B> +<b>ximtoppm</b> -[<B>--alphaout=</B>{<I>alpha-filename</I>,<B>-</B>}] -[<I>ximfile</I>] +[<b>--alphaout=</b>{<i>alpha-filename</i>,<b>-</b>}] +[<i>ximfile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -28,55 +25,55 @@ ximtoppm - convert an Xim file to a PPM image image as output. The Xim toolkit is included in the contrib tree of the X.V11R4 release. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<P>You can abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>ximtoppm</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>--alphaout=</B><I>alpha-filename</I> +<p>You can abbreviate any option to its shortest unique prefix. -<DD><B>ximtoppm</B> creates a PGM file containing the transparency channel +<dl compact> +<dt><b>--alphaout=</b><i>alpha-filename</i> + +<dd><b>ximtoppm</b> creates a PGM file containing the transparency channel values in the input image. If the input image doesn't contain a -transparency channel, the <I>alpha-filename</I> file contains all zero -(transparent) transparency values. If you don't specify <B>--alphaout</B>, -<B>ximtoppm</B> does not generate a transparency file, and if the input -image has a transparency channel, <B>ximtoppm</B> simply discards it. +transparency channel, the <i>alpha-filename</i> file contains all zero +(transparent) transparency values. If you don't specify <b>--alphaout</b>, +<b>ximtoppm</b> does not generate a transparency file, and if the input +image has a transparency channel, <b>ximtoppm</b> simply discards it. -<P>If you specify <B>-</B> as the filename, <B>ximtoppm</B> writes the +<p>If you specify <b>-</b> as the filename, <b>ximtoppm</b> writes the transparency output to Standard Output and discards the image. -<P>Actually, an Xim image can contain an arbitrary fourth channel -- -it need not be a transparency channel. <B>ximtoppm</B> extracts any fourth +<p>Actually, an Xim image can contain an arbitrary fourth channel -- +it need not be a transparency channel. <b>ximtoppm</b> extracts any fourth channel it finds as described above; it doesn't matter if it is a transparency channel or not. -<P>See <B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B> for one way to use +<p>See <b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b> for one way to use the transparency output file. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<B><A HREF="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</A></B>, -<B><A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A></B> +<b><a href="pamcomp.html">pamcomp</a></b>, +<b><a href="ppm.html">ppm</a></b> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> <p>Copyright (C) 1991 by Jef Poskanzer. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/ybmtopbm.html b/ybmtopbm.html index a5e2b4f1..54d29d49 100644 --- a/ybmtopbm.html +++ b/ybmtopbm.html @@ -1,52 +1,53 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Ybmtopbm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>ybmtopbm</H1> +<html><head><title>Ybmtopbm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>ybmtopbm</h1> Updated: 06 March 1990 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> ybmtopbm - convert a Bennet Yee "face" file to PBM -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>ybmtopbm</B> +<b>ybmtopbm</b> -[<I>facefile</I>] +[<i>facefile</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>ymtopbm</b> reads a file acceptable to the <b>face</b> and -<b>xbm</b> programs by Bennet Yee (<A -HREF="mailto:bsy+@cs.cmu.edu">bsy+@cs.cmu.edu</A>). and writes a PBM +<b>xbm</b> programs by Bennet Yee (<a +href="mailto:bsy+@cs.cmu.edu">bsy+@cs.cmu.edu</a>). and writes a PBM image as output. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> - -<A HREF="pbmtoybm.html">pbmtoybm</A>, -<A HREF="pbm.html">pbm</A> - -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> - -<P>Copyright (C) 1991 by Jamie Zawinski and Jef Poskanzer. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -x<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> + +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>ybmtopbm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) + +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> + +<a href="pbmtoybm.html">pbmtoybm</a>, +<a href="pbm.html">pbm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +<p>Copyright (C) 1991 by Jamie Zawinski and Jef Poskanzer. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/yuvsplittoppm.html b/yuvsplittoppm.html index 6f8f9bac..44309f42 100644 --- a/yuvsplittoppm.html +++ b/yuvsplittoppm.html @@ -1,72 +1,70 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Yuvsplittoppm User Manual</TITLE> -</HEAD><BODY> -<H1>yuvsplittoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Yuvsplittoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>yuvsplittoppm</h1> Updated: 26 August 93 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<h2>NAME</h2> yuvsplittoppm - convert separate Y, U, and V files into a PPM image -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>yuvsplittoppm </B> +<b>yuvsplittoppm </b> -<I>basename</i> +<i>basename</i> <i>width</i> -<i>height</I> +<i>height</i> [<b>-ccir601</b>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. <p><b>yuvsplittoppm</b> reads three files, containing the YUV -components, as input. These files are <I>basename</I>.Y, -<I>basename</I>.U, and <I>basename</I>.V. Produces a PPM image +components, as input. These files are <i>basename</i>.Y, +<i>basename</i>.U, and <i>basename</i>.V. Produces a PPM image on Standard Output. -<P>Since the YUV files are raw files, the dimensions <I>width</I> and -<I>height</I> must be specified on the command line. +<p>Since the YUV files are raw files, the dimensions <i>width</i> and +<i>height</i> must be specified on the command line. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>OPTIONS</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<DL COMPACT> -<DT><B>-ccir601</B> +<p>In addition to the options common to all programs based on libnetpbm +(most notably <b>-quiet</b>, see <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>), <b>yuvsplittoppm</b> recognizes the following +command line option: -<DD> +<dl compact> +<dt><b>-ccir601</b> + +<dd> Assumes that the YUV triplets are scaled into the smaller range of the CCIR 601 (MPEG) standard. Else, the JFIF (JPEG) standard is assumed. -</DL> +</dl> -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -<A HREF="ppmtoyuvsplit.html">ppmtoyuvsplit</A>, -<A HREF="yuvtoppm.html">yuvtoppm</A>, <A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<a href="ppmtoyuvsplit.html">ppmtoyuvsplit</a>, +<a href="yuvtoppm.html">yuvtoppm</a>, <a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> -<A NAME="lbAG"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> -Marcel Wijkstra <<A -HREF="mailto:wijkstra@fwi.uva.nl">wijkstra@fwi.uva.nl</A>>, based +Marcel Wijkstra <<a +href="mailto:wijkstra@fwi.uva.nl">wijkstra@fwi.uva.nl</a>>, based on <b>ppmtoyuvsplit</b>. -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A><H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">OPTIONS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAG">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/yuvtoppm.html b/yuvtoppm.html index 4c2fa594..e1898e43 100644 --- a/yuvtoppm.html +++ b/yuvtoppm.html @@ -1,26 +1,23 @@ <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 3.2//EN"> -<HTML><HEAD><TITLE>Yuvtoppm User Manual</TITLE></HEAD> -<BODY> -<H1>yuvtoppm</H1> +<html><head><title>Yuvtoppm User Manual</title></head> +<body> +<h1>yuvtoppm</h1> Updated: 25 March 91 -<BR> -<A HREF="#index">Table Of Contents</A> -<A NAME="lbAB"> </A> -<H2>NAME</H2> +<br> +<a href="#index">Table Of Contents</a> +<h2>NAME</h2> yuvtoppm - convert Abekas YUV bytes to PPM -<A NAME="lbAC"> </A> -<H2>SYNOPSIS</H2> +<h2 id="synopsis">SYNOPSIS</h2> -<B>yuvtoppm</B> +<b>yuvtoppm</b> -<I>width</i> +<i>width</i> <i>height</i> -[<I>imagedata</I>] +[<i>imagedata</i>] -<A NAME="lbAD"> </A> -<H2>DESCRIPTION</H2> +<h2 id="description">DESCRIPTION</h2> <p>This program is part of <a href="index.html">Netpbm</a>. @@ -34,33 +31,37 @@ maxval of the input is 255. about the Abekas YUV format. -<A NAME="lbAE"> </A> -<H2>SEE ALSO</H2> +<h2 id="options">OPTIONS</h2> -<A HREF="ppmtoyuv.html">ppmtoyuv</A>, -<A HREF="ppm.html">ppm</A> +<p>There are no command line options defined specifically +for <b>yuvtoppm</b>, but it recognizes the options common to all +programs based on libnetpbm (See <a href="index.html#commonoptions"> +Common Options</a>.) -<A NAME="lbAF"> </A> -<H2>AUTHOR</H2> +<h2 id="seealso">SEE ALSO</h2> -Marc Boucher <<A -HREF="mailto:marc@PostImage.COM">marc@PostImage.COM</A>>, based on +<a href="ppmtoyuv.html">ppmtoyuv</a>, +<a href="ppm.html">ppm</a> + +<h2 id="author">AUTHOR</h2> + +Marc Boucher <<a +href="mailto:marc@PostImage.COM">marc@PostImage.COM</a>>, based on Example Conversion Program, A60/A64 Digital Video Interface Manual, page 69. <p>Copyright (C) 1991 by DHD PostImage Inc. -<P>Copyright (C) 1987 by Abekas Video Systems Inc. - -<HR> -<A NAME="index"> </A> -<H2>Table Of Contents</H2> -<UL> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAB">NAME</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAC">SYNOPSIS</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAD">DESCRIPTION</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAE">SEE ALSO</A> -<LI><A HREF="#lbAF">AUTHOR</A> -</UL> -</BODY> -</HTML> +<p>Copyright (C) 1987 by Abekas Video Systems Inc. + +<hr> +<h2 id="index">Table Of Contents</h2> +<ul> +<li><a href="#synopsis">SYNOPSIS</a> +<li><a href="#description">DESCRIPTION</a> +<li><a href="#options">OPTIONS</a> +<li><a href="#seealso">SEE ALSO</a> +<li><a href="#author">AUTHOR</a> +</ul> +</body> +</html> |